diff options
| author | Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net> | 2016-07-15 07:46:51 +0300 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net> | 2016-07-15 07:46:51 +0300 |
| commit | a77660f5928d04ef04bdef5032936488f62a9d26 (patch) | |
| tree | 10207781a65ff0e42ce7d2480a47ef1d8c111c50 /docs | |
| parent | 47dff84004a0f9f8d5faf3138e20aaec28d410ac (diff) | |
| download | tools-a77660f5928d04ef04bdef5032936488f62a9d26.tar tools-a77660f5928d04ef04bdef5032936488f62a9d26.tar.gz tools-a77660f5928d04ef04bdef5032936488f62a9d26.tar.bz2 tools-a77660f5928d04ef04bdef5032936488f62a9d26.tar.xz tools-a77660f5928d04ef04bdef5032936488f62a9d26.zip | |
Update Japanese translation
Diffstat (limited to 'docs')
120 files changed, 10743 insertions, 4 deletions
diff --git a/docs/installer/ja.po b/docs/installer/ja.po index b0a97e14..0d438588 100644 --- a/docs/installer/ja.po +++ b/docs/installer/ja.po @@ -3,14 +3,14 @@ # This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Installer Help package. # # Translators: -# taro yamada <riokoko5@gmail.com>, 2016 +# ook rio <riokoko5@gmail.com>, 2016 msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Mageia\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2016-02-10 16:29+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2016-04-27 07:46+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: taro yamada <riokoko5@gmail.com>\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2016-04-27 16:17+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: ook rio <riokoko5@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Japanese (http://www.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/mageia/" "language/ja/)\n" "Language: ja\n" diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/DrakLive-cover.xml b/docs/installer/ja/DrakLive-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5e8e4a05 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/DrakLive-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="Quick-Startup"> + <info> + <title>Installation from LIVE medium</title> + <publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher> + <revhistory> + <revision> + <date>January 2015</date> + <revremark>Mageia 5</revremark> + </revision> + </revhistory> + <cover> + <para role="tagline">The Official Documentation for Mageia</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="mageia-2013.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>. + </para> + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>. + </para> + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + <article> + <title>Installation from LIVE medium</title> + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="bootLive.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="bestTime.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboardLive.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="testing.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="unused.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="reboot.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="login.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> + </article> +</book>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/DrakLive.xml b/docs/installer/ja/DrakLive.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..923d85a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/DrakLive.xml @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="Quick-Startup"> + <info> + <title>Installation from LIVE medium</title> + + <cover> + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para> + + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para> + + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="bootLive.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="bestTime.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboardLive.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="testing.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="unused.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="reboot.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="login.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> +</article>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/DrakX-cover.xml b/docs/installer/ja/DrakX-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..98959136 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/DrakX-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="Quick-Startup"> + <info> + <title>Installation with DrakX</title> + <publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher> + <revhistory> + <revision> + <date>February 2014</date> + <revremark>Mageia 4</revremark> + </revision> + </revhistory> + <cover> + <para role="tagline">The Official Documentation for Mageia</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="mageia-2013.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>. + </para> + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>. + </para> + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + <article> + + + + + + +<!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before--> +<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed --> +<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva --> +<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml --> +<!--2013-12-08 add soundConfig.xml --> +<title>Installation with DrakX</title> + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/> + --> +<xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="installer.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"></xi:include> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml"> +</xi:include> + + <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="configureServices.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"></xi:include> + + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/> + + + <!--STILL TO BE WRITTEN: <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> + --> +</article> +</book> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/DrakX.xml b/docs/installer/ja/DrakX.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..72b6a8f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/DrakX.xml @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="Quick-Startup"> + <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before--> +<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed --> +<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva --> +<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml --> +<!--2013-12-08 add soundConfig.xml --> +<!--2014-05-07 add selectAndUseISOs2.xml Papoteur--> +<!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/> + --> +<info> + <title>Installation with DrakX</title> + + <cover> + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para> + + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para> + + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="installer.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"></xi:include> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml"> +</xi:include> + + <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="configureServices.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"></xi:include> + + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/> + + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> +</article> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml b/docs/installer/ja/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8ac38c9c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,460 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="Select-and-use-ISOs" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + + <info> + <!-- Made by Lebarhon 2014 03 26 --> +<title xml:id="Select-and-use-ISOs-ti1">Select and use ISOs</title> + </info> + + <section> + <title>序文</title> + + <para>Mageia is distributed via ISO images. This page will help you to choose +which image match your needs.</para> + + <para>There is two families of media:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Classical installer: After booting the media, it will follow a process +allowing to choose what to install and how to configure your target +system. This give you the maximal flexibility for a customized installation, +in particular to choose which Desktop Environment you will install.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>LIVE media: you can boot the media in a real Mageia system without +installing it, to see what you will get after installation. The +installation process is simpler, but you get lesser choices.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>Details are given in the next sections.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Media</title> + + <section> + <title>Definition</title> + + <para>Here, a medium (plural: media) is an ISO image file that allows you to +install and/or update Mageia and by extension any physical support the ISO +file is copied to.</para> + + <para>You can find them <link +ns4:href="http://www.mageia.org/en/downloads/">here</link>.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Classical installation media</title> + + <section> + <title>Common features</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>These ISOs use the traditional installer called drakx.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>They are able to make a clean install or an update from previous releases.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>DVD</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Different media for architecture 32 or 64 bits.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Some tools are available in the Welcome screen: Rescue System, Memory Test, +Hardware Detection Tool.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Each DVD contains many available desktop environments and languages.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>You'll be given the choice during the installation to add non free software.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>DVD dual arch</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Both architectures are present on the same medium, the choice is made +automatically according to the detected CPU.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Uses Xfce desktop only.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Not all languages are available. (be, bg, ca, de, en, es, fr, it, mk, pl, +pt, ru, sv, uk) TO BE CHECKED!</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>It contains non free software.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Live media</title> + + <section> + <title>Common features</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Can be used to preview the distribution without installing it on a HDD, and +optionally install Mageia on to your HDD.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (KDE or GNOME).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Different media for 32 or 64 bit architectures.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Live ISOs can only be used to create clean +installations, they cannot be used to upgrade from previous +releases.</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>They contain non free software.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Live CD KDE</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>KDE desktop environment only.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>English language only.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>32 bit only.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Live CD GNOME</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>GNOME desktop environment only.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>English language only.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>32 bit only.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Live DVD KDE</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>KDE desktop environment only.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>All languages are present.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Different media for 32 or 64 bit architectures.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Live DVD GNOME</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>GNOME desktop environment only.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>All languages are present.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Different media for 32 or 64 bit architectures.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Boot-only CD media</title> + + <section> + <title>Common features</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Each one is a small image that contains no more than that which is needed to +start the drakx installer and find drakx-installer-stage2 and other packages +that are needed to continue and complete the install. These packages may be +on the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or on the +Internet.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient when +bandwidth is too low to download a full DVD, a PC without a DVD drive or a +PC that can't boot from a USB stick.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Different media for 32 or 64 bit architectures.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>English language only.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>boot.iso</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Contains only free software, for those people who refuse to use non-free +software.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>boot-nonfree.iso</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Contains non-free software (mostly drivers, codecs...) for people who need +it.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Downloading and Checking Media</title> + + <section> + <title>Downloading</title> + + <para>Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or +BitTorrent. In both cases, a window gives you some information, such as the +mirror in use and the possibility to change if the bandwidth is to low. If +http is chosen, you may also see something like</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Checking.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>md5sum and sha1sum are tools to check the ISO integrity. Use only one of +them. Keep one of them <link linkend="integrity">for further +usage</link>. Then this window appears:</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Download.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Check the radio button Save File.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title xml:id="integrity">Checking the downloaded media integrity</title> + + <para>Both checksums are hexadecimal numbers calculated by an algorithm from the +file to be downloaded. When you ask these algorithms to recalculate this +number from your downloaded file, either you have the same number and your +downloaded file is correct, or the number is different and you have a +failure. A failure infers that you should retry the download.</para> + + <para>Open a console, no need to be root, and:</para> + + <para>- To use md5sum, type: [sam@localhost]$ <userinput>md5sum +path/to/the/image/file.iso</userinput>.</para> + + <para>- To use sha1sum, type: [sam@localhost]$ <userinput>sha1sum +path/to/the/image/file.iso</userinput>.</para> + + <para>and compare the obtained number on your computer (you may have to wait for a +while) with the number given by Mageia. Example:</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../Md5sum.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Burn or dump the ISO</title> + + <para>The checked ISO can now be burned to a CD or DVD or dumped to a USB +stick. These operations are not a simple copy and aim to make a boot-able +medium.</para> + + <section> + <title>Burning the ISO to a CD/DVD</title> + + <para>Use whatever burner you wish but ensure the burning device is set correctly +to <emphasis role="bold">burn an image</emphasis>, burn data or files is not +correct. There is more information in <link +ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images">the Mageia +wiki</link>.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Dump the ISO to a USB stick</title> + + <para>All Mageia ISOs are hybrids, which means you can 'dump' them to a USB stick +and then use it to boot and install the system.</para> + + <warning> + <para>"dumping" an image onto a flash device destroys any previous file-system on +the device; any other data will be lost and the partition capacity will be +reduced to the image size.</para> + </warning> + + <para>To recover the original capacity, you must redo partitioning and re-format +the USB stick.</para> + + <section> + <title>Using a graphical tool within Mageia</title> + + <para>You can use a graphical tool like <link +ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/IsoDumper_Writing_ISO_images_on_USB_sticks">IsoDumper</link></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Using a graphical tool within Windows</title> + + <para>You could try:</para> + + <para>- <link ns4:href="http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US">Rufus</link> using the +"ISO image" option;</para> + + <para>- <link ns4:href="http://sourceforge.net/projects/win32diskimager">Win32 +Disk Imager</link></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Using Command line within a GNU/Linux system</title> + + <warning> + <para>It is potentially *dangerous* to do this by hand. You risk to overwrite a +disc partition if you get the device-ID wrong.</para> + </warning> + + <para>You can also use the dd tool in a console:</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Open a console</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Become root with the command <userinput>su -</userinput> (don't forget the +final '-' )</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../Root.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Plug your USB stick (do not mount it, this also means do not open any +application or file manager that could access or read it)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Enter the command <userinput>fdisk -l</userinput></para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../Fdisk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Alternatively, you can get the device name with the command +<code>dmesg</code>: at end, you see the device name starting with +<emphasis>sd</emphasis>, and <emphasis>sdd</emphasis> in this case:</para> + + <screen>[72594.604531] usb 1-1: new high-speed USB device number 27 using xhci_hcd +[72594.770528] usb 1-1: New USB device found, idVendor=8564, idProduct=1000 +[72594.770533] usb 1-1: New USB device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3 +[72594.770536] usb 1-1: Product: Mass Storage Device +[72594.770537] usb 1-1: Manufacturer: JetFlash +[72594.770539] usb 1-1: SerialNumber: 18MJTWLMPUCC3SSB +[72594.770713] usb 1-1: ep 0x81 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes +[72594.770719] usb 1-1: ep 0x2 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes +[72594.771122] usb-storage 1-1:1.0: USB Mass Storage device detected +[72594.772447] scsi host8: usb-storage 1-1:1.0 +[72595.963238] scsi 8:0:0:0: Direct-Access JetFlash Transcend 2GB 1100 PQ: 0 ANSI: 4 +[72595.963626] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] 4194304 512-byte logical blocks: (2.14 GB/2.00 GiB) +[72595.964104] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Write Protect is off +[72595.964108] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Mode Sense: 43 00 00 00 +[72595.965025] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] No Caching mode page found +[72595.965031] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Assuming drive cache: write through +[72595.967251] <emphasis>sdd</emphasis>: sdd1 +[72595.969446] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Attached SCSI removable disk</screen> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example +<code>/dev/sdb</code> in the screenshot above, it is a 8GB USB stick.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Enter the command: # <userinput>dd if=path/to/the/ISO/file of=/dev/sdX +bs=1M</userinput></para> + + <para>Where X=your device name eg: /dev/sdc</para> + + <para>Example: # <userinput>dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-4-x86_64-DVD.iso +of=/dev/sdb bs=1M</userinput></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Enter the command: # <userinput>sync</userinput></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Unplug your USB stick, it is done</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/acceptLicense.xml b/docs/installer/ja/acceptLicense.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ff881d01 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/acceptLicense.xml @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="acceptLicense" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 27 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- JohnR: minor mods 2012-3-30 --> +<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back --> +<!-- JohnR: 2012-04-05 - Inserted text from barjac with some modifications: + http://mtf.no-ip.co.uk/doc/help/license.html --> +<!-- marja:2012-04-05 - having a look because this isn't a DocBook5.0 type anymore, + but text/xml. First changing centimetres in screenshot to pixels ( + ), after that nested the two existing sections into a third one--> +<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, marja, 20120409 --> +<!-- barjac:2012-04-10 - edited header to correct formatting after my saves - not + sure what is causing the corruption --> +<!-- JohnR 2012-04-19 language proofreading --> +<title xml:id="acceptLicense-ti1">ライセンスとリリース ノート</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata xml:id="acceptLicense-im1" +revision="4" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="dx2-license.png"/> +</imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="acceptLicense-im2" +revision="5" align="center" condition="live" format="PNG" +fileref="live-license.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section xml:id="license"> + <info> + <title xml:id="license-ti1">使用許諾に同意する</title> + </info> + + <para><application>Mageia</application> をインストールする前に使用許諾をお読みください。</para> + + <para>These terms and conditions apply to the entire +<application>Mageia</application> distribution and must be accepted before +you can continue.</para> + + <para>To accept, simply select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and then click on +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + + <para>If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for +looking. Clicking <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> will reboot your computer.</para> + + + <!-- if you want two sections in a file, both need to be nested in a third section - + marja, 20120405 --> +</section> + + <section xml:id="releaseNotes"> + <!-- + <para> +Release Notes</para> +--> +<info> + <title xml:id="releaseNotes-ti1">リリースノート</title> + </info> + + + + <para>Important information are given about this release of +<application>Mageia</application> and are accessible clicking on the +<guibutton>Release Notes</guibutton> button.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/addUser.xml b/docs/installer/ja/addUser.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..26df1c7b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/addUser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,161 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="addUser" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="addUser-ti1">User and Superuser Management</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Started by marja,using Led43's text, on 2012 03 27 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back --> +<!-- removed para xml:id's, finished the page using Led43's text in the wiki, but + changed his text about the Advanced User Managment screen (the only thing + about guest account there, is the box you can tick or untick to enable or + disable it, the rest is about the normal user you're adding in the previous + screen), marja, 20120409--> +<!-- barjac 2012-04-13 moved explanation of xguest lower down. I don't understand + "rbash" in the xguest warning - is that correct? --> +<!-- JohnR 2012-04-19 Language proofreading --> +<!-- marja 2012-04-24 Added screenshot --> +<!-- marja 2013-04-26 added new note--> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata revision="1" align="center" +xml:id="setRootPassword-im1" fileref="dx2-setRootPassword.png" +format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" +fileref="live-user1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section xml:id="root-password"> + <info> + <title xml:id="root-password-ti2">Set Administrator (root) Password:</title> + </info> + + <para>It is advisable for all <application>Mageia</application> installations to +set a superuser or administrator's password, usually called the +<emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type a password into the +top box the colour of its shield will change from red to yellow to green +depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are +using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box +just below the first password box, this checks that you have not mistyped +the first password by comparing them.</para> + + <note xml:id="givePassword"> + <para>All passwords are case sensitive, it is best to use a mixture of letters +(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section xml:id="enterUser"> + <info> + <title xml:id="enterUser-ti3">ユーザ名を入力</title> + </info> + + <para>Add a user here. A user has fewer rights than the superuser (root), but +enough to surf the internet, use office applications or play games and +anything else the average user does with his computer</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guibutton>Icon</guibutton>: if you click on this button it will change the +users icon.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Real Name</guilabel>: Insert the users real name into this text +box.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Login Name</guilabel>: Here you enter the user login name or let +drakx use a version of the users real name. <emphasis>The login name is case +sensitive.</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Password</guilabel>: In this text box you should type in the user +password. There is a shield at the end of the text box that indicates the +strength of the password. (See also <xref linkend="givePassword"/>)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the user password into this +text box and drakx will check you have the same password in each of the user +password text boxes.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <note> + <para>Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but +write protected) home directory.</para> + + <para>However, while using your new install, any user you add in <emphasis>MCC - +System - Manage users on system</emphasis> will have a home directory that +is both read and write protected.</para> + + <para>If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised +to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot.</para> + + <para>If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all +extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</emphasis> step +during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>The access permissions can also be changed after the install.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section condition="classical" xml:id="addUserAdvanced"> + <info> + <title xml:id="addUserAdvanced-ti3">Advanced User Management</title> + </info> + + <para>If the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> button is clicked you are offered a +screen that allows you to edit the settings for the user you are adding.</para> + + <para condition="classical">Additionally, you can disable or enable a guest account.</para> + + <warning condition="classical"> + <para>Anything a guest with a default <emphasis>rbash</emphasis> guest account +saves to his /home directory will be erased when he logs out. The guest +should save his important files to a USB key.</para> + </warning> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem condition="classical"> + <para><guilabel>Enable guest account</guilabel>: Here you can enable or disable a +guest account. The guest account allows a guest to log into and use the PC, +but he has more restricted access than normal users.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: This drop down list allows you to change the +shell used by the user you are adding in the previous screen, options are +Bash, Dash and Sh</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Here you can set the user ID for the user you +are adding in the previous screen. This is a number. Leave it blank unless +you know what you are doing.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the group ID. Also a +number, usually the same one as for the user. Leave it blank unless you know +what you are doing.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/add_supplemental_media.xml b/docs/installer/ja/add_supplemental_media.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..71a68ea5 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/add_supplemental_media.xml @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="add_supplemental_media" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="add_supplemental_media-ti1">Media Selection (Configure Supplemental Installation Media)</title> + </info> + + + + + +<mediaobject> +<!-- papoteur 2013-04-13 - created --> +<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection --> +<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell --> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-add_supplemental_media.png" format="PNG" revision="1" +xml:id="dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This screen gives you the list of already recognized repositories. You can +add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. The +source selection determines which packages will be available for selection +during the next steps.</para> + + <para>For a network source, there are two steps to follow:</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Choosing and activation of the network, if not already up. </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a +mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by +Mageia, like the Nonfree , the Tainted repositories and the Updates. With +the URL, you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS +installation.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <note> + <para>If you are updating a 64 bit installation which may contain some 32 bit +packages, it is advised to use this screen to add an online mirror by +ticking one of the Network protocols here. The 64 bit DVD iso only contains +64 bit and noarch packages, it will not be able to update the 32 bit +packages. However, after adding an online mirror, installer will find the +needed 32 bit packages there.</para> + </note> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/ask_mntpoint_s.xml b/docs/installer/ja/ask_mntpoint_s.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a2a51590 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/ask_mntpoint_s.xml @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s-ti1">マウントポイントを選択</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + +<mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 28 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back --> +<!-- removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 --> +<!-- barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE" + with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) --> +<!-- Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes --> +<!-- Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans + write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it--> +<!-- And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) --> +<!-- 2012-04-19 Language proofreading done --> +<imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata revision="1" +fileref="dx2-chooseMountpoints.png" align="center" format="PNG" +xml:id="chooseMountPoints-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition='live'> <imagedata revision="1" +fileref="live-chooseMountpoints.png" align="center" format="PNG" +xml:id="live-chooseMountPoints-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If +you don't agree with the <application>DrakX</application> suggestions, you +can change the mount points.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you change anything, make sure you still have a <literal>/</literal> +(root) partition.</para> + </note> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Every partition is shown as follows: "Device" ("Capacity", "Mount point", +"Type").</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>"Device", is made up of: "hard drive", ["hard drive number"(letter)], +"partition number" (for example, "sda5").</para> + </listitem> + + + <listitem> + <para>If you have many partitions, you can choose many different mount points from +the drop down menu, such as <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal> +and <literal>/var</literal>. You can even make your own mount points, for +instance <literal>/video</literal> for a partition where you want to store +your films, or <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> for the +<literal>/home</literal> partition of a cauldron install.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>For partitions you don't need to have access to, you can leave the mount +point field blank.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <warning> + <para>Choose <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure what to choose, +and then tick <guilabel>Custom disk partitioning</guilabel>. In the screen +that follows, you can click on a partition to see its type and size.</para> + </warning> + + <para>If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>, and choose whether you only want to format the +partition(s) DrakX suggests, or more.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/bestTime.xml b/docs/installer/ja/bestTime.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7d541d49 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/bestTime.xml @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="bestTime" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="bestTime-ti1">Clock settings</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject condition="live"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="live-bestTime.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="bestTime-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In this step, you have to select on which time your internal clock is set, +either local time or UTC time.</para> + + <para>In advanced tab, you will find more options about clock settings.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/bootLive.xml b/docs/installer/ja/bootLive.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2abcb44e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/bootLive.xml @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="bootLive" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="bootLive-ti1">Boot Mageia as Live system</title> + </info> + + <section xml:id="bootLive-1"> + <info> + <title xml:id="bootLive1-ti1">Booting the medium</title> + </info> + + <section> + <info> + <title xml:id="bootLive11-ti1">From a disc</title> + </info> + + <para>You can boot directly from the media you used to burn your image (CD-ROM, +DVD-ROM...). You usually just need to insert it in your CD/DVD drive for the +bootloader to launch the installation automatically after rebooting the +computer. If that does not happen you may need to reconfigure your BIOS or +press one key that will offer you to choose the peripheral from which the +computer will boot.</para> + + <para>According to which hardware you have, and how it is configured, you get +either one or another of the two screens below.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <info> + <title xml:id="bootLive12-ti1">From a USB device</title> + </info> + + <para>You can boot from the USB device on which you dumped your image +ISO. According to your BIOS settings, the computer boots perhaps directly on +the USB device already plugged in a port. If that does not happen you may +need to reconfigure your BIOS or press one key that will offer you to choose +the peripheral from which the computer will boot.</para> + </section> + </section> + + <section xml:id="biosmode"> + <info> + <title xml:id="biosmode-ti1">In BIOS/CSM/Legacy mode</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-bootCSM.png"/> </imageobject> + + <caption> + <para>First screen while booting in BIOS mode</para> + </caption> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In the middle menu, you have the choice between three actions:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Boot Mageia: That means Mageia 5 will start from the connected media (CD/DVD +or USB stick) without writing anything on the disk, so expect a very slow +system. Once the boot is done, you can proceed to the installation on a hard +disk.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Install Mageia: This choice will directly install Mageia on a hard disk.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Boot from hard disk: This choice allows to boot from hard disk, as usual, +when no media (CD/DVD or USB stick) is connected. (not working with Mageia +5).</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>In the bottom menu, are the Boot Options:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>F1 - Help. Explain the options "splash", "apm", "acpi" and "Ide"</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>F2 - Language. Choose the display language of the screens.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>F3 - Screen resolution. Choose between text, 640x400, 800x600, 1024x728</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>F4 - CD-Rom. CD-Rom or Other. Normally, the installation is performed from +the inserted installation medium. Here, select other sources, like FTP or +NFS servers. If the installation is carried out in a network with an SLP +server, select one of the installation sources available on the server with +this option.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>F5 - Driver. Yes or No. The system is aware about the presence of an +optional disk with a driver update and will require its insertion during +installation process.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>F6 - Kernel options. This is a way to specify options according to your +hardware and the drivers to use.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section xml:id="uefimode"> + <info> + <title xml:id="uefimode-ti1">In UEFI mode</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject condition="live"> + <imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center" +fileref="live-bootUEFI.png" format="PNG" xml:id="bootUEFI-im1"/> +</imageobject> + + <caption> + <para>First screen while booting on UEFI system from disk</para> + </caption> + </mediaobject> + + <para>You have only the choice to run Mageia in Live mode (first choice) or to +process the installation (second choice).</para> + <para>If you booted from a USB stick, you get two supplemental lines which are a +duplicata of the previous lines suffixed with "USB". You have to choose +them.</para> + + <para>In each case, the first steps will be the same to choose language, timezone +and keyboard, then the processes differ, with <link +linkend="testing">additional steps in Live mode</link>.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/chooseDesktop.xml b/docs/installer/ja/chooseDesktop.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8fc9b28d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/chooseDesktop.xml @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="chooseDesktop"> + + + <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page--> +<info> + <title xml:id="chooseDesktop-ti1">デスクトップの選択</title> + </info> + + + + + <para>Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to fine +tune your choice.</para> + + <para>After the selection step(s), you will see a slide show during package +installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the +<guilabel>Details</guilabel> button</para> + + + +<mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-chooseDesktop.png" align="center" +format="PNG" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Choose whether you prefer to use the <application>KDE</application> or +<application>Gnome</application> desktop environment. Both come with a full +set of useful applications and tools. Tick <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if +you want to use neither or both, or if you want something other than the +default software choices for these desktop environments. The +<application>LXDE</application> desktop is lighter than the previous two, +sporting less eye candy and fewer packages installed by default.</para> + </section> + diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/choosePackageGroups.xml b/docs/installer/ja/choosePackageGroups.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a2baba92 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/choosePackageGroups.xml @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="choosePackageGroups"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="choosePackageGroups-ti1">パッケージグループを選択</title> + </info> + + + +<mediaobject> +<!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page--> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-choosePackageGroups.png" +align="center" format="PNG" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Packages have been sorted into groups, to make choosing what you need on +your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however +more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which +become visible as the mouse is hovered over them.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Workstation.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Server.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Graphical Environment.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Individual Package Selection: You can use this option to manually add or +remove packages.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <para>Read <xref linkend="minimal-install"></xref> for instructions on how to do a +minimal install (without or with X & IceWM).</para> + </section> + diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/choosePackagesTree.xml b/docs/installer/ja/choosePackagesTree.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c1cf9796 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/choosePackagesTree.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="choosePackagesTree"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="choosePackagesTree-ti1">Choose Individual Packages</title> + </info> + + + +<mediaobject> +<!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page--> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-choosePackagesTree.png" align="center" +format="PNG" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customise your +installation.</para> + + <para>After having made your choice, you can click on the <guibutton>floppy +icon</guibutton> at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages +(saving to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the +same packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install +and choosing to load it.</para> + </section> + diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/configureServices.xml b/docs/installer/ja/configureServices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..99c07f41 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/configureServices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xml:id="configureServices" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + + <info> + <title xml:id="configureServices-ti1">Configure your Services</title> + </info> + + + + + +<mediaobject> +<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot --> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureServices.png" +align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureServices-im1"></imagedata> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa1">Here you can set which services should (not) start when you boot your +system.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa2">There are four groups, click on the triangle before a group to expand it and +see all services in it.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa3">The setting DrakX chose are usually good.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa4">If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info +box below.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa5">Only change things when you know very well what you are doing.</para> + </section> + diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/configureTimezoneUTC.xml b/docs/installer/ja/configureTimezoneUTC.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c56697ff --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/configureTimezoneUTC.xml @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC"> + <info> + <title xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-ti6">Configure your Timezone</title> + </info> + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot --> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata +xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-im1" revision="1" +fileref="dx2-configureTimezoneUTC.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> +</imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-timeZone.png" +condition="live" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa1">Choose your time zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the +same time zone.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2">In next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time or to +GMT, also known as UTC.</para> + + <note> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa3">If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they +are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT.</para> + </note> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/configureX_card_list.xml b/docs/installer/ja/configureX_card_list.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6a6ca0f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/configureX_card_list.xml @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="configureX_card_list"> + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Initiated by Marja 2012-08-08 --> +<!-- Further text JohnR 2012-08-29 --> +<!-- tproof --> +<!-- lproof --> +<!-- Done corrections accordind to tmb remarks. Papoteur --> +<title xml:id="configureX_card_list-ti1">Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center" +xml:id="configureX_card_list-im1" fileref="dx2-configureX_card_list.png" +format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually +correctly identify your video device.</para> + + <para>If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know +which one you have, you can select it from the tree by: <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>vendor</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>then the name of your card</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>and the type of card</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <para>If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in +the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the +Xorg category</para> + + <para>The Xorg listing provides more than 40 generic and open source video card +drivers. If you still can't find a named driver for your card there is the +option of using the vesa driver which provides basic capabilities.</para> + + <para>Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access +to the Commandline Interface.</para> + + <para>Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which +may only be available in the Nonfree repository and in some cases only from +the card manufacturers' websites.</para> + + <para>The Nonfree repository needs to be explicitly enabled to access them. If +you didn't select it previously, you should do this after your first reboot.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/configureX_chooser.xml b/docs/installer/ja/configureX_chooser.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4872f658 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/configureX_chooser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureX_chooser" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="configureX_chooser-ti1">Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration</title> + </info> + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page--> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureX_chooser.png" +align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureX_chooser-im1"> </imagedata> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa1">No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) +you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are +all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window +System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for +<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> or +any other graphical environment to work well, the following +<acronym>X</acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the correct +settings if you can see that <application>DrakX</application> didn't make a +choice, or if you think the choice is incorrect.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa2"><emphasis><guibutton>Graphic card</guibutton></emphasis>: Choose your card +from the list if needed.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3"><emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose +<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> when applicable, or choose your monitor +from the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel> +list. Choose <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the +horizontal and vertical refresh rates of your monitor.</para> + + <warning> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3a">Incorrect refresh rates may damage your monitor</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa4"><emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: Set the desired +resolution and color depth of your monitor here.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa5"><emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not +always appear during install. If the button is there, you can control your +settings by pressing it. If you see a question asking you whether your +settings are correct, you can answer "yes", and the settings will be +kept. If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen +and be able to reconfigure everything until the test is good. <emphasis>Make +sure your settings are on the safe side if the test button isn't +available</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa6"><emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to +enable or disable various options.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/configureX_monitor.xml b/docs/installer/ja/configureX_monitor.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a217564e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/configureX_monitor.xml @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="configureX_monitor" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Initiated by Marga 2012-8-09 --> +<!-- Further text JohnR 2012-08-30 --> +<!-- tproof --> +<!-- lproof --> +<title xml:id="configureX_monitor-ti1">Choosing your Monitor</title> + </info> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1">DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually +correctly identify yours.</para> + + <warning> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1w"><emphasis>Selecting a monitor with different characteristics could damage +your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something without knowing +what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should consult your monitor +documentation</para> + </warning> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-configureX_monitor.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="1" + xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa2"><emphasis>Custom</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa3">This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh +rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the +screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are +displayed.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa4">It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor +type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you +may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and +consult your monitor documentation.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa5"><emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa6">This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the +monitor database.</para> + + <para revision="1" + xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa7"><emphasis>Vendor</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa8">If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which +one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting: <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>vendor</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the monitor manufacturers name</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the monitor description</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <para revision="1" + xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa9"><emphasis>Generic</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa10">selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as +1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is +often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver +when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it +may be wise to be conservative in your selections.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/diskdrake.xml b/docs/installer/ja/diskdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..45667a6b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/diskdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="diskdrake"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 29 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! --> +<!-- JohnR added note for bug 133 re encrypted partitions --> +<!-- JohnR 2012-04-10 - tidy up module formatting --> +<!-- Marja, 2012-04-18 changed "If you wish to use encryption on + any of your partitions" into "If you wish to use encryption on + your <literal> +/</literal> partition" because pterjan said this is only for root + Also added some text. --> +<!--marja 20120418 moved section end tag down to where it belongs--> +<!--marja 20120418 added para 6a--> +<title xml:id="diskdrake-ti1">Custom disk partitioning with DiskDrake</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata fileref="dx2-diskdrake.png" +align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition='live' > <imagedata +fileref="live-diskdrake.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <warning> + <para revision="3" xml:id="diskdrake-pa1">If you wish to use encryption on your <literal>/</literal> partition you +must ensure that you have a separate <literal>/boot</literal> partition. The +encryption option for the <literal>/boot</literal> partition must NOT be +set, otherwise your system will be unbootable.</para> + </warning> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake-pa3">Adjust the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create +partitions, change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even +view what is in them before you start.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa4">There is a tab for every detected hard disk or other storage device, like an +USB key. For example sda, sdb and sdc if there are three of them.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa5">Push <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> to wipe all partitions on the selected +storage device</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa6">For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, +or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it.</para> + + <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa6a" revision="1">Continue until you adjusted everything to your wishes.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa7">Click <guibutton>Done</guibutton> when you're ready.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you are installing Mageia on an UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI +System Partition) is present and correctly mounted on /boot/EFI (see above)</para> + + <para><mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-diskdrake2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></para> + </note> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/doPartitionDisks.xml b/docs/installer/ja/doPartitionDisks.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cb1f7cdd --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/doPartitionDisks.xml @@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="doPartitionDisks"> + + + + + <info> + <!----> +<!-- lebarhon 2015-07-03 Suggested updates for Mageia 5 --> +<title xml:id="doPartitionDisks-ti1">パーティションの設定</title> + </info> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa1">In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) and see the +solutions the DrakX partitioning wizard found for where to install +<application>Mageia</application>.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa2">The options available from the list below will vary depending on your +particular hard drive(s) layout and content.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa3"><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa4">Use Existing Partitions</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa5">If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have +been found and may be used for the installation.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa6">Use Free Space</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa7">If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for +your new Mageia installation.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa8">Use Free Space on a Windows Partition</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa9">If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may +offer to use it.</para> + + <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa10" revision="2">This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia installation, +but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have backed up all +important files!</para> + + <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa11" revision="3">Note that this involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition. The +partition must be "clean", meaning that Windows must have closed down +correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, +although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been +moved out of the area that is about to be used. It is highly recommended to +back up your personal files.</para> + + <para>With this option, the installer displays the remaining Windows partition in +light blue and the future Mageia partition in dark blue with their intended +sizes just under. You have the possibility to adapt these sizes by clicking +and dragging the gap between both partitions. See the screen-shot below.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks2.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa12">Erase and use Entire Disk.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa13">This option will use the complete drive for Mageia.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa14">Note! This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care!</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa15">If you intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already +have data on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use +this option.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa16">カスタム</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa17">This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your +hard drive(s).</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Partitions sizing:</emphasis></para> + + <para>The installer will share the available place out according to the following +rules:</para> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If the total available place is lower than 50 GB, only one partition is +created for /, there is no separate partition for /home.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If the total available place is over 50 GB, then three partitions are +created</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>6/19 of the total available place is allocated to / with a maximum of 50 GB</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>1/19 is allocated to swap with a maximum of 4 GB</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the rest (at least 12/19) is allocated to /home</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <para>That means that from 160 GB and over of available place, the installer will +create three partitions: 50 GB for /, 4 GB for swap and the rest for /home.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you are using an UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be +automatically detected, or created if it does not exist yet, and mounted on +/boot/EFI. The "Custom" option is the only one that allows to check it has +been correctly done</para> + </note> + + <warning> + <para>Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the +previous standard of 512 byte logical sectors. Due to lack of available +hardware, the partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested +with such a drive. Also some ssd drives now use an erase block size over 1 +MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning +tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following +settings:</para> + + <para>"Align to" "MiB"</para> + + <para>"Free space preceding (MiB)" "2"</para> + + <para>Also make sure all partitions are created with an even number of megabytes.</para> + </warning> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/exitInstall.xml b/docs/installer/ja/exitInstall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ec4ad07f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/exitInstall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="exitInstall" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="exitInstall-ti1">おめでとうございます</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 29 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! --> +<!-- marja - 2012-04-24 added screenshot and text --> +<!-- same day, added "s" to "sytems"--> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-exitInstall.png" +format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="exitInstall-im1"> </imagedata> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="exitInstall-pa1">You have finished installing and configuring +<application>Mageia</application> and it is now safe to remove the +installation medium and reboot your computer.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="exitInstall-pa2">After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating +systems on your computer (if you have more than one).</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa3">If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install +will be automatically selected and started. </para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa4">Enjoy!</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa5">Visit www.mageia.org if you have any questions or want to contribute to +Mageia </para> + + +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/formatPartitions.xml b/docs/installer/ja/formatPartitions.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..181249ef --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/formatPartitions.xml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="formatPartitions"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="formatPartitions-ti1">Formatting</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 29 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot --> +<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 --> +<imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata revision="1" +fileref="dx2-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG" align="center" +xml:id="formatPartitions-im1"> </imagedata> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition='live'> <imagedata revision="1" +fileref="live-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG" align="center" +xml:id="live-formatPartitions-im1"> </imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa1">Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on +partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be saved.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa2">Usually at least the partitions DrakX selected, need to be formatted</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa3">Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> to choose partitions you want to +check for so called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis></para> + + <tip> + <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa4">If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on +<guibutton>Previous</guibutton>, again on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> +and then on <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> to get back to the main screen. +In that screen you can choose to view what is in your partitions.</para> + </tip> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa5">When you are confident about the selection, click on +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/installUpdates.xml b/docs/installer/ja/installUpdates.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4077999c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/installUpdates.xml @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="installUpdates"><info><title xml:id="installUpdates-ti1">更新</title></info> + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename--> +<!-- marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot --> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-installUpdates.png" +format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="installUpdates-im1"></imagedata> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa1">Since this version of <application>Mageia</application> was released, some +packages will have been updated or improved.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa2">Choose <guilabel>yes</guilabel> if you wish to download and install them, +select <guilabel>no</guilabel> if you don't want to do this now, or if you +aren't connected to the Internet</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa3">Then press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue</para> + +</section> +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/installer.xml b/docs/installer/ja/installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f66281bc --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,270 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="installer" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30, using barjac's text --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!--removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, marja, 20120409 --> +<!--barjac 2012-04-11 - corrected link to Welcome screen and unmangled header - + seems to be corrupted by xxe addon when saving --> +<!-- JohnR - apparent corruption is caused by the positioning of this comment block + - corrected Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes --> +<!-- barjac 18/04/2012 Commented out para relating to peripherals, as it's apparently wrong --> +<title xml:id="installer-ti1">DrakX, the Mageia Installer</title> + </info> + + <para>Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia +Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as +possible.</para> + + + + <!-- <para> +If you have peripherals like printers or scanners, it is [best] to + connect them and make sure they are powered up during installation. These + will be automatically detected and configured.</para> --> +<para>The initial menu screen has various options, however the default one will +start the installer, which will normally be all that you will need.</para> + + <figure xml:id="dx-welcome"> + <info> + <title xml:id="installer-ti2">Installation Welcome Screen</title> + </info> + + <para>Here are the default welcome screens when using a Mageia DVD, The first one +with a legacy system and the second one with an UEFI system: + </para> + +<mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="BId-drakx-intro-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="../dx-welcome.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome2.png" align="center"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>From this first screen, it is possible to set some personal preferences:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The language (for the installation only, may be different that the chosen +language for the system) by pressing the key F2 (Legacy mode only)</para> + + <para/> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome-lang.png" align="center"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Use the arrow keys to select the language and press the key Enter.</para> + + <para>Here is for example, the French welcome screen when using a Live +DVD/CD. Note that the Live DVD/CD menu does not propose: <guilabel>Rescue +System</guilabel>, <guilabel>Memory test</guilabel> and <guilabel>Hardware +Detection Tool</guilabel>.</para> + + <para/> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome4fr.png" align="center"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para/> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Change the screen resolution by pressing the F3 key (Legacy mode only).</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome5def.png" align="center"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Add some kernel options by pressing the <emphasis role="bold">F6</emphasis> +key for the legacy mode or the <emphasis role="bold">e</emphasis> key for +the UEFI mode.</para> + + <para>If the installation fails, then it may be necessary to try again using one +of the extra options. The menu called by F6 displays a new line called +<guilabel>Boot options</guilabel> and propose four entries:</para> + + <para>- Default, it doesn't alter anything in the default options.</para> + + <para>- Safe Settings, priority is given to the safer options to the detriment of +performances.</para> + + <para>- No ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface), power management +isn't taken into account.</para> + + <para>- No Local APIC (Local Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller), it is +about CPU interruptions, select this option if you are asked for.</para> + + <para>When you select one of these entries, it modifies the default options +displayed in the <guilabel>Boot Options</guilabel> line.</para> + + <note> + <para>In some Mageia releases, it may happen that the entries selected with the +key F6 does not appear in the <guilabel>Boot Options</guilabel> line, +however, they are really taken into account.</para> + </note> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-welcome6opt.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Add more kernel options by pressing the key F1 (Legacy mode only).</para> + + <para>Pressing F1 opens a new window with more available options. Select one with +the arrow keys and press Enter to have more details or press the Esc key to +go back to the welcome screen.</para> + + <para/> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcomeHelp1.png" align="center"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <para>The detailed view about the option splash. Press Esc or select +<guilabel>Return to Boot Options</guilabel> to go back to the options +list. These options can by added by hand in the <guilabel>Boot +options</guilabel> line.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-welcomeHelp2.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <note> + <para>The help is translated in the chosen language with the F2 key.</para> + </note> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>For more information about kernel options on legacy and UEFI systems, see: +<link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_set_up_kernel_options">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_set_up_kernel_options</link></para> + + <para>Here is the default welcome screen when using a Wired Network-based +Installation CD (Boot.iso or Boot-Nonfree.iso images):</para> + + <para>It does not allow to change the language, the available options are +described in the screen. For more information about using a Wired +Network-based Installation CD, see <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Boot.iso_install">the Mageia +Wiki</link></para> + + <warning> + <para>The keyboard layout is the American one.</para> + </warning> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="installer-im2" align="center" +format="PNG" fileref="../dx-help.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section xml:id="installationSteps"> + <info> + <title xml:id="installationSteps-ti1">The installation steps</title> + </info> + + <para>The install process is divided into a number of steps, which can be followed +on the side panel of the screen.</para> + + <para>Each step has one or more screens which may also have +<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> buttons with extra, less commonly required, +options.</para> + + <para>Most screens have <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons which give further +explanations about the current step.</para> + + <note> + <para>If somewhere during install you decide to stop the installation, it is +possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a +partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your +computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well +leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure +rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys +<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press +<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section xml:id="installationProblems"> + <info> + <title xml:id="installationProblems-ti1">Installation Problems and Possible Solutions</title> + </info> + + <section xml:id="noX"> + <info> + <title xml:id="noX-ti2">No Graphical Interface</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>After the initial screen you did not reach the language selection +screen. This can happen with some graphic cards and older systems. Try using +low resolution by typing <code>vgalo</code> at the prompt.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="2">If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be +possible. In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use +this hit ESC at the first welcome screen and confirm with ENTER. You will be +presented with a black screen with the word "boot:". Type "text" and hit +ENTER. Now continue with the installation in text mode.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section xml:id="installFreezes"> + <info> + <title xml:id="installFreezes-ti1">The Install Freezes</title> + </info> + + <para>If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a +problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic detection of +hardware may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type +<code>noauto</code> at the prompt. This option may also be combined with +other options as necessary.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="kernelOptions"> + <info> + <title xml:id="kernelOptions-ti1">RAM problem</title> + </info> + + <para>These will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the +available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the +<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of +RAM. e.g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="DynamicPartitions"> + <info> + <title xml:id="DynamicPartitions-ti1">Dynamic partitions</title> + </info> + + <para>If you converted your hard disk from "basic" format to "dynamic" format on +Microsoft Windows, you must know that it is impossible to install Mageia on +this disc. To go back to a basic disk, see the Microsoft documentation: +<link +ns2:href="http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx</link>.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section> + diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/login.xml b/docs/installer/ja/login.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..37db6376 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/login.xml @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="login" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="label-to-adapt-ti1">Login screen</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject condition="live"> + <imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="login-im1" +format="PNG" fileref="live-login.png"/> </imageobject> + + <caption> + <para>KDM login screen</para> + </caption> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Finally, you will come to the login screen.</para> + + <para>Enter your user name and user password, and in a few seconds you will find +yourself with a loaded KDE or GNOME desktop, depending on which live medium +you used. You can now start using your Mageia installation.</para> + + <para>You can find another part of our documentation in <link +linkend="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Category:Documentation">the Mageia +wiki</link>.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/media_selection.xml b/docs/installer/ja/media_selection.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..edd99ff9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/media_selection.xml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="media_selection" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="media_selection-ti1">Media Selection (Nonfree)</title> + </info> + + + + + + +<mediaobject> +<!-- papoteur 2013-04-11 - created --> +<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)--> +<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell --> +<!--marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)--> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-media_selection.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="media_selection-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are +available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories +selection determines which packages will be available for selection during +the next steps.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains +the base of the distribution.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository includes packages that are +free-of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain +closed-source software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this +repository includes nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers, +firmware for various WiFi cards, etc.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under +a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is +that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, +e.g. Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages +needed to play commercial video DVD, etc.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/minimal-install.xml b/docs/installer/ja/minimal-install.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a4073083 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/minimal-install.xml @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="minimal-install" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to + start a new page--> +<!--2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot and s/next/related/ --> +<info> + <title xml:id="minimal-install-ti1">Minimal Install</title> + </info> + + + + + <para>You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the +Package Group Selection screen, see <xref +linkend="choosePackageGroups"></xref>.</para> + <para>If desired, you can additionally tick the "Individual package selection" +option in the same screen.</para> + <para>Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for +their <application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised +workstation. You will probably use this option combined with the "Individual +package selection" option mentioned above, to fine-tune your installation, +see <xref linkend="choosePackagesTree"></xref>.</para> + <para>If you choose this installation class, then the related screen will offer +you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X.</para> + <para>If selected, "With X" will also include IceWM as lightweight desktop +environment.</para> + <para>The basic documentation is provided in the form of man and info pages. It +contains the man pages from the <link +xlink:href="http://www.tldp.org/manpages/man.html">Linux Documentation +Project</link> and the <link +xlink:href="http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/">GNU +coreutils</link> info pages.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-minimal-install.png" +align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="minimal-install-im1"></imagedata> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + </section> + diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/misc-params.xml b/docs/installer/ja/misc-params.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8ebeaa0b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/misc-params.xml @@ -0,0 +1,210 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="misc-params" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-ti1">Summary of miscellaneous parameters</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 31 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND REVIEWED! --> +<!--marja - 2012 04 15 added some text, not much, unfortunately :( --> +<!--marja 2012-04-24 added screenshots --> +<!--JohnR 2012-04-25 Added text as requested by Psec :-)--> +<!--marja 2012-04-24 added 2 links to other help pages --> +<!--marja 2012-04-24 added some text in the drakxid-configureServices and + the drakxid-miscellaneous section --> +<!--marja 2012-04-24 corrected "Magaia" in the last paragraph --> +<!--marja 2012-04-24 corrected para xml:id number in the last paragraph --> +<!-- 2012-05-01 marja - added You-Cheng Hsieh's section about IBus etc. --> +<!-- 2012-08-09 marja - replaced linkend="setupBootloaderBeginner" by linkend="setupBootloader" --> +<!--2012-12-25 marja - moved configureTimezoneUTC, selectCountry, configureServices and SecurityLevel out to separate files--> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-summary.png" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="summary-im1" /> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-pa1">DrakX made smart choices for the configuration of your system depending on +the choices you made and on the hardware DrakX detected. You can check the +settings here and change them if you want after pressing +<guibutton>Configure</guibutton>.</para> + + <section xml:id="misc-params-system"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-system-ti2">System parameters</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2" revision="1"><guilabel>Timezone</guilabel></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2a" revision="1">DrakX selected a time zone for you, depending on your preferred +language. You can change it if needed. See also <xref +linkend="configureTimezoneUTC"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3" revision="1"><guilabel>Country / Region</guilabel></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3a">If you are not in the selected country, it is very important that you +correct the setting. See <xref linkend="selectCountry"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel></para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4a">DrakX has made good choices for the bootloader setting.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4b">Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure Grub and/or Lilo</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4c">For more information, see <xref linkend="setupBootloader"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5"><guilabel>User management</guilabel></para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5a">You can add extra users here. They will each get their own +<literal>/home</literal> directories.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6"><guilabel>Services</guilabel>:</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6a" revision="1">System services refer to those small programs which run the background +(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain tasks.</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6b" revision="1">You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may +prevent your computer from operating correctly.</para> + + <para>For more information, see <xref linkend="configureServices"/></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section xml:id="misc-params-hardware"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-hardware-ti3">Hardware parameters</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1"><guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>:</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1a" revision="1">This is where you setup or change your keyboard layout which will depend on +your location, language or type of keyboard.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2"><guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2a">Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs +etc.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3"><guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>:</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3a">The installer uses the default driver, if there is a default one. The option +to select a different driver is only given when there is more than one +driver for your card, but none of them is the default one.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Graphical interface</guilabel>:</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4a">This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4b">For more information, see <xref linkend="configureX_chooser"/>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="summaryBottom-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="dx2-summaryBottom.png" /> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + </section> + + <section xml:id="misc-params-network"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-network-ti4">Network and Internet parameters</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-network-pa1"><guilabel>Network</guilabel>:</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa2" revision="1">You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free +drivers it is better to do that after reboot, in the <application>Mageia +Control Center</application>, if you have not yet enabled the Nonfree media +repositories.</para> + + <warning> + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa3" revision="1">When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to watch +that interface as well.</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>プロキシ</guilabel>:</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4a" revision="1">A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider +internet. This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a +proxy service.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4b">You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you +need to enter here</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section xml:id="misc-params-security"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-security-ti5">セキュリティ</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1" revision="1"><guilabel>Security Level</guilabel>:</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1a">Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default +setting (Standard) is adequate for general use.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1b">Check the option which best suits your usage.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2" revision="1"><guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2a" revision="1">A firewall is intended to be a barrier between your important data and the +rascals out there on the internet who would compromise or steal it.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2b">Select the services that you wish to have access to your system. Your +selections will depend on what you use your computer for.</para> + + <warning> + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2c">Bear in mind that allowing everything (no firewall) may be very risky.</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/reboot.xml b/docs/installer/ja/reboot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d99c53de --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/reboot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="reboot" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="reboot-ti1">再起動</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject condition="live"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="live-reboot.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="reboot-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Once the bootloader has been installed, you will be prompted to halt your +computer, remove the live CD and restart the computer. When you restart, you +will see a succession of download progress bars. These indicate that the +software media are being downloaded (see Software management).</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/resizeFATChoose.xml b/docs/installer/ja/resizeFATChoose.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ef24fd1f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/resizeFATChoose.xml @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="resizeFATChoose"> + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 31 --> +<!--2013-12-01 re-adding this file to software/i18n/tools/docs/installer/en + in git, in case the related screen gets restored in drakx-installer-stage2--> +<title xml:id="resizeFATChoose-ti1">Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> +partition</title> + </info> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa1">You have more than one +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition. +Choose which one should be made smaller to make space for installing +<application>Mageia</application>.</para> + + + +<!--<para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa2"> +.......</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa3">........</para>--> +</section> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/securityLevel.xml b/docs/installer/ja/securityLevel.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4d3b53eb --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/securityLevel.xml @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xml:id="securityLevel" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + + <info> + <title xml:id="securityLevel-ti1">セキュリティレベル</title> + </info> + + + + +<mediaobject> +<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot --> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-securityLevel.png" +align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="securityLevel-im1"></imagedata> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa1">You can adjust your security level here.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa2">Leave the default settings as they are, if you don't know what to choose.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="securityLevel-pa3">After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings +in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> part of the Mageia Control Center.</para> + </section> + diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/selectCountry.xml b/docs/installer/ja/selectCountry.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..48c9a720 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/selectCountry.xml @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xml:id="selectCountry" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + + + <info> + <title xml:id="selectCountry-ti1">Select your Country / Region</title> + </info> + + + + +<mediaobject> +<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot --> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-selectCountry.png" +align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="selectCountry-im1"></imagedata> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + + <para revision="2" xml:id="selectCountry-pa1">Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, +like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country +can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa2">If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other +Countries</guilabel> button and choose your country / region there.</para> + + <note> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa3">If your country is only in the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> list, +after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem a country from the +first list was chosen. Please ignore this, DrakX will follow your real +choice.</para> + </note> + + <section xml:id="inputMethod"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="inputMethod-ti7">Input method</title> + </info> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa4">In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an +input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input +multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the +default input method in Mageia DVDs, Africa/India and Asia/no-India +Live-CDs. For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input +method so users should not need to configure it manually. Other input +methods(SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions and can be +installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package selection.</para> + + <note> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa5">If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it +after you boot your installed system via "Configure your Computer" -> +"System", or by running localedrake as root.</para> + </note> + </section> + </section> + diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/selectInstallClass.xml b/docs/installer/ja/selectInstallClass.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a36a837 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/selectInstallClass.xml @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="selectInstallClass"> + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 --> +<!-- 20120405 updated JohnR --> +<!-- enhanced xml code for screenshot, removed para xml:id's, changed "you'll" to + "you will" and "don't" to "do not" and a passive to an active tense, marja, 20120409--> +<!-- barjac 2012-04-10 In the spirit of KISS reverted to my initial basic version --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja, corrected typo in screenshot name, removed --> +<title xml:id="selectInstallClass-ti1">Install or Upgrade</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectInstallClass.png" align="center" +format="PNG"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>インストール</para> + + <para>Use this option for a fresh <application>Mageia</application> installation.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Upgrade</para> + + <para>If you have one or more <application>Mageia</application> installations on +your system, the installer will allow you to upgrade one of them to the +latest release.</para> + +<warning> + <para>Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was <emphasis>still +supported</emphasis> when this installer's version was released, has been +thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that had already +reached its End Of Life when this one was released, then it is better to do +a clean install while preserving your <literal>/home</literal> partition.</para> +</warning> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <note> + <para>If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to +reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been +formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in +the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an +unusable system. If in spite of that you are very sure rebooting is what you +want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys <guilabel>Alt Ctrl +F2</guilabel> at the same time. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl +Delete</guilabel> simultaneously to reboot.</para> + </note> + + <tip> + <para>If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you +can return from the "Install or Upgrade" screen to the language choice +screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. Do +<emphasis>not</emphasis> do this later in the install.</para> + </tip> +</section> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/selectKeyboard.xml b/docs/installer/ja/selectKeyboard.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..76544e26 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/selectKeyboard.xml @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="selectKeyboard" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + <info> + <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 31 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<title xml:id="selectKeyboard-ti1">キーボード</title> + </info> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa1">DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable +keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-selectKeyboard.png" /> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa2">Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard +layout. If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the +specifications that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There +may even be a label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also +look here: <link +xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa3">If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on +<guibutton>More</guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard +there.</para> + + <para revision="1"><warning> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa5">After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog, +you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though +a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this anomaly +and continue the installation: Your keyboard is the one you chose from the +full list.</para> + </warning></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa4">If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an +extra dialog screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the Latin +and non-Latin keyboard layouts</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/selectKeyboardLive.xml b/docs/installer/ja/selectKeyboardLive.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..81e54a0d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/selectKeyboardLive.xml @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="selectKeyboardLive"> + <info> + <title xml:id="selectKeyboardLive-ti1">Select keyboard</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="selectKeyboardLive-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="live-selectKeyboard.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>You will be required to set the keyboard layout you wish to use in +Mageia. The default one is selected according to your language and +timezone previously selected.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/selectLanguage.xml b/docs/installer/ja/selectLanguage.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..111645f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/selectLanguage.xml @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="selectLanguage" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 01, using barjac's text --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has had a look --> +<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, corrected wrong + code in figure, marja, 20120409 --> +<!-- barjac 2012-04-11 - removed image figure tag - and once again had to clean + up mess made of this header by xxe --> +<title xml:id="selectLanguage-ti1">使用する言語を選んでください。</title> + </info> + + <para>Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your +continent. <application>Mageia</application> will use this selection during +the installation and for your installed system.</para> + + <para condition="classical">If it is likely that you will require several languages installed on your +system, for yourself or other users, then you should use the +<guibutton>Multiple languages</guibutton> button to add them now. It will be +difficult to add extra language support after installation.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-selectLanguage.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata fileref="live-language.png" format=""/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <warning condition="classical"> + <para>Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one of them +as your preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be +marked as chosen in the multiple languages screen .</para> + </warning> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem condition="classical"> + <para>If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then +it is advisable to install the language of your keyboard as well.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default.</para> + + <para condition="classical">This may be disabled in the "multiple languages" screen if you know that it +is inappropriate for your language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed +languages.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>You can change the language of your system after installation in the Mageia +Control Center -> System -> Manage localization for your system.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/selectMouse.xml b/docs/installer/ja/selectMouse.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4e62fcbe --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/selectMouse.xml @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="selectMouse" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="selectMouse-ti1">Select mouse</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 11 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place--> +<!-- marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot --> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectMouse.png" align="center" +format="PNG" > </imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa1">If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a +different one here.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa2">Usually, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Any PS/2 and USB +mice</guilabel> is a good choice.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa3">Select <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel> to +configure the buttons that do not work on a mouse with six or more buttons.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/setupBootloader.xml b/docs/installer/ja/setupBootloader.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ce2852e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/setupBootloader.xml @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="setupBootloader"> + + + + + <info> + <!----> +<!--Lebarhon 2015 07 04 Project for Mageia 5. The UEFI and BIOS systems are so different I think it is better to split the page--> +<title xml:id="setupBootloader-ti1">ブートローダのメインオプション</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center" +fileref="dx2-setupBootloader.png" xml:id="setupBootloader-im1" +format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>With a Bios system</title> + + <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa1" revision="4">If you prefer different bootloader settings to those chosen automatically by +the installer, you can change them here.</para> + + <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa2" revision="4">You may already have another operating system on your machine, in which case +you need to decide whether to add Mageia to your existing bootloader, or +allow Mageia to create a new one.</para> + + <tip> + <para>The Mageia graphical menus are nice :</para> + </tip> + + <section xml:id="usingMageiaBootloader"> + <info> + <title xml:id="usingMageiaBootloader-ti2">Using a Mageia bootloader</title> + </info> + + <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa4">By default, Mageia writes a new GRUB (legacy) bootloader into the MBR +(Master Boot Record) of your first hard drive. If you already have other +operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them to your new Mageia +boot menu.</para> + + <para revision="3">Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB +legacy and Lilo.</para> + + <warning> + <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa6">Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by +GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognized if the default GRUB bootloader is +used.</para> + + <para revision="3">The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at +the Summary page during installation.</para> + </warning> + </section> + + <section xml:id="usingExistingBootloader"> + <info> + <title revision="2" xml:id="usingExistingBootloader-ti4">Using an existing bootloader</title> + </info> + + <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa46">If you decide to use an existing bootloader then you will need to remember +to STOP at the summary page during the installation and click the Bootloader +<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button, which will allow you to change the +bootloader install location.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa47">Do not select a device e.g."sda", or you will overwrite your existing +MBR. You must select the root partition that you chose during the +partitioning phase earlier, e.g. sda7.</para> + + <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa48" revision="1">To be clear, sda is a device, sda7 is a partition on that device.</para> + + <tip> + <para revision="1" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa48a">Go to tty2 with Ctrl+Alt+F2 and type <literal>df</literal> to check where +your <literal>/</literal> (root) partition is. Ctrl+Alt+F7 takes you back to +the installer screen.</para> + </tip> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa49">The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader +is beyond the scope of this help, however in most cases it will involve +running the relevant bootloader installation program which should detect and +add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating system in +question.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="advancedOptionBootloader"> + <info> + <title revision="2" xml:id="advancedOptionBootloader-ti5">Bootloader advanced option</title> + </info> + + <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa52">If you have very limited disk space for the <literal>/</literal> partition +that contains <literal>/tmp</literal>, click on +<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and check the box for <guilabel>Clean /tmp +at each boot</guilabel>. This helps to maintain some free space.</para> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>With an UEFI system</title> + + <para>With an UEFI system, the user interface is slightly different as you cannot +choose the boot loader since only Grub2-efi is available. </para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-setupBootloader2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>If Mageia is the first system installed on your computer, the installer +created an ESP (EFI System Partition) to receive the bootloader +(Grub2-efi). If there was already UEFI operating systems previously +installed on your computer (Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer +detected the existing ESP created by Windows and added grub2-efi. Although +it is possible to have several ESPs, only one is advised and enough whatever +the number of operating systems you have.</para> + + <para>Don't modify the "Boot Device" unless really knowing what you do.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml b/docs/installer/ja/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f1d1d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + + <info> + <!--Lebarhon 2015 07 04 Project for Mageia 5. The UEFI and BIOS systems are so different I think it is better to split the page--> +<title xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-ti1">Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" +fileref="dx2-bootloaderConfiguration.png" align="center" format="PNG" +xml:id="bootloaderConfiguration-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>With a Bios system</title> + + <para>You can add an entry or modify the one you select first, by pressing the +relevant button in the <emphasis>Bootloader Configuration</emphasis> screen +and editing the screen that pops up on top of it.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you have chosen <code>Grub 2</code> as your bootloader, you cannot use +this tool to edit entries at this step, press 'Next'. You need to manually +edit <code>/boot/grub2/custom.cfg</code> or use <code>grub-customizer</code> +instead.</para> + </note> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="dx2-setupBootloaderAddEntry.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Some things that can be done without any risk, are changing the label of an +entry and ticking the box to make an entry the default one.</para> + + <para>You can add the proper version number of an entry, or rename it completely.</para> + + <para>The default entry is the one the systems boots into if you don't make a +choice while booting up.</para> + + <warning> + <para>Editing other things can leave you with an unbootable system. Please don't +just try something without knowing what you are doing.</para> + </warning> + </section> + + <section> + <title>With an UEFI system</title> + + <para>In this case you are using Grub2-efi and you cannot use this tool to edit +entries at this step. To do that you need to manually edit +<code>/boot/grub2/custom.cfg</code> or use <code>grub-customizer</code> +instead. All you can do here, is to choose the default entry in the drop +down list.</para> + + <para>After a click on the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button, another drop down +list allows to choose the video resolution for Grub2 which is a graphical +boot loader.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-bootloaderConfiguration2.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/setupSCSI.xml b/docs/installer/ja/setupSCSI.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fa900477 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/setupSCSI.xml @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xml:id="setupSCSI" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="setupSCSI-ti1">Setup SCSI</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 02 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 --> +<!-- SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) --> +<!-- barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. --> +<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot --> +<!-- marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the + Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file --> +<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-setupSCSI.png" +format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="setupSCSI-im1"></imagedata> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="3.1" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa1">DrakX usually detects hard disks correctly. With some older SCSI controllers +it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use and subsequently +fail to recognise the drive.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa2">If this happens, you will need to manually tell Drakx which SCSI drive(s) +you have.</para> + + <para revision="3" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa3">DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) correctly.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/soundConfig.xml b/docs/installer/ja/soundConfig.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a376b68 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/soundConfig.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xml:id="soundConfig" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="soundConfig-ti1">サウンドの設定</title> + </info> + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Started by marja on 2013-12-07 --> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-soundConfig.png" revision="1" +format="PNG" xml:id="soundConfig-im1" /> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen the name of the driver that the installer chose for your +sound card is given, which will be the default driver if we have a default +one. + </para> + <para>The default driver should work without problems. However, if after install +you do encounter problems, then run <command>draksound</command> or start +this tool via MCC (Mageia Control Center), by choosing the +<guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> tab and clicking on <guilabel>Sound +Configuration</guilabel> at the top right of the screen. + </para> + <para>Then, in the draksound or "Sound Configuration" tool screen, click on +<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and then on +<guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> to find very useful advice about how +to solve the problem. + </para> + + <section xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced"> + <info> + <title xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced-ti1">詳細</title> + </info> + + <para>Clicking <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> in this screen, during install, is +useful if there is no default driver and there are several drivers +available, but you think the installer selected the wrong one. + </para> + + <para>In that case you can select a different driver after clicking on +<guibutton>Let me pick any driver</guibutton>. + </para> + + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/takeOverHdConfirm.xml b/docs/installer/ja/takeOverHdConfirm.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3c641394 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/takeOverHdConfirm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-ti1">Confirm hard disk to be formatted</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 03 --> +<!-- test comment - johnr --> +<!-- 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct + hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I + saw this help screen when I had only one HD --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot --> +<imageobject condition='live'> <imagedata +fileref="live-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG" align="center" +></imagedata> </imageobject> <imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata +fileref="dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG" align="center" +></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa1">Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure about your +choice.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa2">Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you are sure and want to erase every +partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/testing.xml b/docs/installer/ja/testing.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..919b5f6b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/testing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="testing" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="testing-ti1">Testing Mageia as Live system</title> + </info> + + <section xml:id="testing-1"> + <info> + <title xml:id="testing1-ti1">Live mode</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-liveMode.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>You get this screen if you selected "Boot Mageia". If not, you get the +"<link linkend="doPartitionDisks">Partitioning</link> step"</para> + + <section> + <info> + <title xml:id="testing2-ti1">Testing hardware</title> + </info> + + <para>One of the Live mode goals is to test if the hardware is correctly managed +by Mageia. You can check if all devices have a driver in the Hardware +section of the Mageia Control Center. You can test the most current devices:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>network interface: configure it with net_applet</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>graphical card: if you see the previous screen, it's already OK.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>webcam:</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>sound: a jingle has already been played</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>printer: configure it and print a test page</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>scanner: scan a document from ...</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>If all is OK for you, you can process to the installation. If not, you can +leave with the quit button.</para> + + <remark>The configuration settings you made here are kept for the installation.</remark> + </section> + + <section> + <info> + <title xml:id="testing3-ti1">Launch installation</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-liveMode-install.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>To launch the installation of Mageia LiveCD or Live DVD to the hard disc or +SSD drive, simply click on the icon "Install on Hard Disk". You will get +this screen, and then the "<link +linkend="doPartitionDisks">Partitioning</link> step" as for the direct +installation.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/uninstall-Mageia.xml b/docs/installer/ja/uninstall-Mageia.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c4973b79 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/uninstall-Mageia.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="uninstall-Mageia"> + <!--Lebarhon 2015-07-06 Not true with UEFI --> +<info> + <title xml:id="uninstall-Mageia-ti1">Uninstalling Mageia</title> + </info> + + + + <section> + <title xml:id="uninstall-Mageia-ti2">Howto</title> + + <para>If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly, in short +you want get rid of it. That is your right and Mageia also gives you the +possibility to uninstall. This is not true for every operating system.</para> + + <para>After your data backup, reboot your installation Mageia DVD and select +Rescue system, then, Restore Windows boot loader. At the next boot, you will +only have Windows with no option to choose your operating system.</para> + + <para>To recover the space used by Mageia partitions on Windows, click on +<code>Start -> Control Panel -> Administrative Tools -> Computer Management +-> Storage -> Disk Management</code> to access to the partition +management. You will recognize the Mageia partition because they are labeled +<guilabel>Unknown</guilabel>, and also by their size and place in the +disk. Right click on each of these partitions and select +<guibutton>Delete</guibutton>. The space will be freed.</para> + + <para>If you are using Windows XP, you can create a new partition and format it +(FAT32 or NTFS). It will get a partition letter.</para> + + <para>If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the +existing partition that is at the left of the freed space. There are other +partitioning tools that can be used, such as gparted, available for both +windows and linux. As always, when changing partitions, be very careful, and +make sure all important things have been backed up.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/installer/ja/unused.xml b/docs/installer/ja/unused.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e4783fe5 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/installer/ja/unused.xml @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="unused" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="unused-ti1">Keep or delete unused material</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject condition="live"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="live-unused.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="unused-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In this step, the installer looks for unused locales packages and unused +hardware packages. Then it proposes you to delete them. It is a good idea to +accept, except if you prepare an installation which has to run on different +hardware.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-unused-InstallationProgress.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The next step is the copying of files on hard disk. This takes some +minutes. At the end, you get a blank screen for some time, it's normal.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja.po b/docs/mcc-help/ja.po index 418df323..9ed0c4a7 100644 --- a/docs/mcc-help/ja.po +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja.po @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Mageia\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2016-02-26 22:38+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2016-04-25 08:06+0000\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2016-05-24 15:28+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>\n" "Language-Team: Japanese (http://www.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/mageia/" "language/ja/)\n" diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/MCC-cover.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/MCC-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2e93c75c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/MCC-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="MCC"> + + <info> + <title>Mageia コントロール センター</title> + <cover> + <para role="tagline">The tools to configure the Mageia system</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="mageia-2013.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>. + </para> + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>. + </para> + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + <article> + +<xi:include href="mcc-intro.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="software-management.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-sharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networkservices.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-hardware.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-network.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-system.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networksharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-localdisks.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-security.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-boot.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="otherMageiaTools.xml"></xi:include> + +</article> +</book> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/MCC.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/MCC.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b11852ef --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/MCC.xml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="MCC"> + + <info> + <title>Mageia コントロール センター</title> + <cover> + <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>. + </para> + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>. + </para> + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + +<xi:include href="mcc-intro.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="software-management.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-sharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networkservices.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-hardware.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-network.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-system.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networksharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-localdisks.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-security.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-boot.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="otherMageiaTools.xml"></xi:include> + +</article> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/MageiaUpdate.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/MageiaUpdate.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b476d899 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/MageiaUpdate.xml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="MageiaUpdate"> + <info> + <title xml:id="MageiaUpdate-ti1">RPM のアップデート</title> + + <subtitle>MageiaUpdate or drakrpm-update</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="MageiaUpdate-im1" align="center" fileref="MageiaUpdate.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">MageiaUpdate</emphasis> or <emphasis +role="bold">drakrpm-update</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Software +management.</emphasis></para> + + <para><note> + <para>To work, MageiaUpdate needs the repositories to be configured with +drakrpm-editmedia with some media checked as updates. If they are not, you +are prompted to do so.</para> + </note></para> + + <para>As soon as this tool is launched, it scans the installed packages and lists +those with an update available in the repositories. They are all selected by +default to be automatically downloaded and installed. Click on the +<guibutton>Update</guibutton> button to start the process.</para> + + <para>By clicking on a package, more information is displayed in the lower half of +the window. The print<emphasis role="bold"> ></emphasis> before a title +means you can click to drop down a text.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>When updates are available, an applet in the system tray warns you by +displaying this red icon <inlinemediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="MageiaUpdate1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </inlinemediaobject> +. Just click and enter the user password to update the system alike.</para> + </note></para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/XFdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/XFdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..89f996f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/XFdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="XFdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="XFdrake-ti1">グラフィカルサーバを設定</title> + + <subtitle>XFdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="XFdrake-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="XFdrake.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis +role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>. Select <emphasis><guilabel>Set up the +graphical server</guilabel></emphasis>. <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing +<emphasis>XFdrake</emphasis> as normal user or <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis> +as root. Mind the capital letters.</para> + </footnote></para> + + <para/> + + <para>The buttons allow you to change the graphical configuration.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Graphic card</emphasis>:</para> + + <para>The graphic card currently detected is displayed and the matching server +configured. Click on this button to change to another server, for example +one with a proprietary driver.</para> + + <para>The available servers are sorted under <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> by +manufacturer in alphabetical order and then by model also in alphabetical +order. The free drivers are sorted by alphabetical order under<guilabel> +Xorg</guilabel>.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>In case of problems, <emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis> will work with most +graphic cards and give you time to find and install the right driver while +in your Desktop Environment.</para> + + <para>If even Vesa doesn't work, choose <emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</guilabel> - +<guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, which is used while installing +Mageia, but doesn't allow you to change resolution or refresh rates.</para> + </note>If you made your choice for a free driver, you may be asked if you want to +use a proprietary driver instead with more features (3D effects for +example).</para> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Monitor:</emphasis></para> + + <para>In the same way as above, the monitor currently detected is displayed and +you can click on the button to change to another one. If the desired monitor +isn't in the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> list, choose in the +<guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list a monitor with the same features.</para> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Resolution:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This button allows the choice of the resolution (number of pixels) and the +colour depth (number of colours). It displays this screen:</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="XFdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>When you change the color depth, a +multi-colored bar will appear next to the second button and show a preview +of what the selected color depth looks like.</para> + + <para>The first button shows the currently resolution, click to change for another +one. The list gives all the possible choices according to the graphic card +and the monitor, it is possible to click on <guilabel>Other</guilabel> to +set other resolutions, but bear in mind that you can damage your monitor or +select an uncomfortable setting.</para> + + <para>The second button shows the currently colour depth, click to change this for +another one.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>Depending on the chosen resolution, it may be necessary to logout and +restart the graphical environment for the settings to take effect.</para> + </note></para> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Test:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Once the configuration done, it is recommended to do a test before clicking +on OK because it is easier to modify the settings now than later if the +graphical environment doesn't work.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>In case of a non working graphical environment, type Alt+Ctrl+F2 to open a +text environment, connect as root and type XFdrake (with the caps) to to use +XFdrake's text version.</para> + </note>If the test fails, just wait until the end, if it works but you don't want +to change after all, click on <guibutton>No</guibutton>, if everything is +right, click on <guibutton role="bold">OK</guibutton>.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <title>オプション:</title> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Global options</guilabel>: If <emphasis>Disable +Ctrl-Alt-Backspace</emphasis> is checked, it will no longer be possible to +restart X server using Ctrl+Alt+Backspace keys.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Graphic card options</guilabel>: Allows you to enable or disable +three specific features depending on the graphic card.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Graphical interface at startup</guilabel>: Most of the time, +<emphasis>Automatically start the graphical interface (Xorg) upon +booting</emphasis> is checked to make the boot switch to graphical mode, it +may be unchecked for a server.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <para>After a click on the <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> button, the system will ask +you to confirm. There is still time to cancel everything and keep the +previous configuration, or to accept. In this case, you have to disconnect +and reconnect to activate the new configuration.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/diskdrake--dav.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/diskdrake--dav.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..955aabe9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/diskdrake--dav.xml @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="diskdrake--dav" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--dav-ti1">WebDAV 共有ドライブ/ディレクトリにアクセス</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --dav</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="diskdrake--dav1.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake--dav-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found in the Mageia +Control Center, under the Network Sharing tab, labeled <guilabel>Configure +WebDAV shares</guilabel>.</para> + + <section> + <title>序文</title> + + <para><link xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV">WebDAV</link> is a +protocol that allows to mount a web server's directory locally, so that it +appears as a local directory. It is necessary that the remote machine run a +WebDAV server. This is not the aim of this tool to configure the WebDAV +server.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Creating a new entry</title> + + <para>The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if +any, and a <guibutton>New</guibutton> button. Use it to create a new +entry. Insert the server URL in the field of the new screen.</para> + + <para>Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions. Continue +with the action <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> by clicking +<guibutton>OK</guibutton> after selecting the radio button, as the +<guibutton>Server</guibutton> is already configured. You can however correct +it, if needed.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this mount +point.</para> + + <para>In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some other +options, you can give them in the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> screen.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The option <guibutton>Mount</guibutton> allows you to mount immediately the +access.</para> + + <para>After you accepted the configuration with the radio button +<guibutton>Done</guibutton>, the first screen is displayed again and your +new mount point is listed. After you choose <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>, you +are asked whether or not to save the modifications in +<emphasis>/etc/fstab</emphasis>. Choose this option if you want that the +remote directory is available at each boot. If your configuration is for +one-time usage, do not save it.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/diskdrake--fileshare.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/diskdrake--fileshare.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a86fd464 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/diskdrake--fileshare.xml @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-ti1">ハードディスクのパーティションを共有</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --fileshare</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--fileshare.png" revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-im1" align="center" format="PNG" /> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This simple tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> allows you, the +administrator, to allow users to share parts of their own /home +subdirectories with other users of a same local network which may have +computers running either Linux or Windows operating system.</para> + + <para>It is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Local Disk tab, labelled +"Share your hard disk partitions".</para> + + <para>First, answer the question : "<guilabel>Would you like to allow users to +share some of their directories ?</guilabel>", click on <guibutton>No +sharing</guibutton> if the answer is no for all users, click on +<guibutton>Allow all users</guibutton> for all users and click on +<guibutton>Custom</guibutton> if the answer is no for some users and yes for +the others. In this last case, the users that are authorised to share their +directories must belong to the fileshare group, which is automatically +created by the system. You will be asked about this later.</para> + + <para>Click on <guilabel>OK</guilabel>, a second screen appears which asks you +choose between <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> or <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>. +Check <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> if Linux is the only operating system on +the network, check <guibutton>SMB</guibutton> if the network includes both +Linux and Windows machines and then click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Any +required packages will be installed if necessary.</para> + + <para>The configuration is now complete unless the Custom option was chosen. In +this case, an extra screen prompts you to open Userdrake. This tool allows +you to add users authorised to share their directories to the fileshare +group. In the User tab, click on the user to add to the fileshare group, +then on <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem>, In the Groups tab. Check the +fileshare group and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. For more information +about Userdrake, see <link ns2:href="userdrake.xml">this page</link></para> + + <para/> + + <note> + <para>When adding a new user to the fileshare group, you have to disconnect and +reconnect the network for the modifications to be taken into account.</para> + </note> + + <para>From now on each user belonging to the fileshare group can select in his/her +file manager the directories to be shared, although not all file managers +have this facility.</para> + +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/diskdrake--nfs.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/diskdrake--nfs.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a87f4e09 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/diskdrake--nfs.xml @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-ti1">NFS 共有ドライブ/ディレクトリにアクセス</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --nfs</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-im1" align="center" fileref="diskdrake--nfs.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <para>.</para> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>序文</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to declare some +shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The +protocol used for this is NFS which is available on most Linux or Unix +systems. The shared directory will be thus available directly at +boot. Shared directories can be also accessible directly in a single session +for a user with tools such as file browsers.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Procedure</title> + + <para>Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers +which share directories.</para> + + <para>Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list of the +shared directories and select the directory you want to access.</para> + + <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs2.png"> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The button <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> will be available and you have +to specify where to mount the directory.</para> + + <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs3.png"> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>After choosing the mount point, You can mount it. You can also verify and +change some options with the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button. After +mounting the directory, you can unmount it with the same button.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>On accepting the configuration with the <guibutton>Done</guibutton> button, +a message will displayed, asking "Do you want to save the /etc/fstab +modifications". This will make the directory available at each boot, if the +network is accessible. The new directory is then available in your file +browser, for example in Dolphin.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/diskdrake--removable.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/diskdrake--removable.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4af96c9d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/diskdrake--removable.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="diskdrake--removable"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--removable-ti1">CD/DVD burner</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --removable</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" fileref="diskdrake--removable.png" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="diskdrake--removable-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote>is found under the tab Local +disks in the Mageia Control Center labelled accordingly with your removable +hardware (CD/DVD players and burners and floppy drives only). </para> + + <para>Its goal is to define the way your removable disk is mounted. </para> + + <para>At the top of the window there is a short description of your hardware and +the chosen options to mount it. Use the menu on the bottom to change +them. Check the item to be changed and then on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> +button. </para> + + <section> + <title>マウントポイント</title> + + <para>Check this box to change the mount point. The default one is /media/cdrom.</para> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>オプション</title> + + <para>Many mount options can be chosen here either directly in the list or via the +<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> submenu. The main are:</para> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>user/nouser</title> + + <para>user allows an ordinary user (not root) to mount the removable disk, this +option involves noexec, nosuid and nodev. The user who mounted the disk is +the only one who can umount it. </para> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/diskdrake--smb.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/diskdrake--smb.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..16b4efab --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/diskdrake--smb.xml @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="diskdrake--smb" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--smb-ti1">Windows (Samba) 共有ドライブ/ディレクトリにアクセス</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --smb</subtitle> + + </info> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>序文</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to declare which +shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The +protocol used for this is SMB which has been popularized on Windows(R) +systems. The shared directory will be available directly at boot. Shared +directories can be also accessed directly in a single session by a user with +tools such as file browsers.</para> + + <para>Before starting the tool, it is a good idea to declare the names of +available servers, for example with <xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Procedure</title> + + <para>Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers who +share directories.</para> + + <para>Click on the server name and on > before the server name to display the +list of the shared directories and select the directory you want to access.</para> + + <para>The <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> button will become available, you +have to specify where to mount the directory.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>After choosing the mount point, it can be mounted with the <guimenu>Mount +button</guimenu>. You can also verify and change some options with the +<guibutton>Options</guibutton> button.</para> + + <para>In options, you can specify the user name and the password of those able to +connect to the SMB server. After mounting the directory, you can unmount it +with the same button.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>After accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will ask +"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications". Saving, will allow +directory to made available at each boot, if the network is accessible. The +new directory is then available in your file browser, for example in +dolphin.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drak3d.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drak3d.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f04776dd --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drak3d.xml @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drak3d" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drak3d-ti1">3D Desktop Effects</title> + + <subtitle>drak3d</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im1" revision="1" align="center" fileref="drak3d.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>序文</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drak3d</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> lets you manage the 3D +desktop effects on your operating system. 3D effects are turned off by +default.</para> + </section> + + <section annotations="center"> + <title>Getting Started</title> + + <para>To use this tool, you need to have the glxinfo package installed. If the +package is not installed, you will be prompted to do so before drak3d can +start.</para> + + <para>After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window. Here you +can choose either <guilabel>No 3D Desktop Effects</guilabel> or +<guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion is part of a +composite/window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special +effects for your desktop. Choose <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel> to turn +it on.</para> + + <para>If this is your first time using this program after a clean installation of +Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which packages need to be +installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the +<guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button to continue.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im3" fileref="drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Once the appropriate packages are installed, you will notice that Compiz +Fusion is selected in the drak3d menu, but you must log out and log back in +for the changes to take effect.</para> + + <para>After logging back in, Compiz Fusion will be activated. To configure Compiz +Fusion, see the page for the ccsm (CompizConfig Settings Manager) tool.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>トラブルシューティング</title> + + <section> + <title>Can't See Desktop after Logging in</title> + + <para>If after turning on Compiz Fusion you attempt to log back into your desktop +but can't see anything, restart your computer to get back to the log in +screen. Once there, click on the Desktop icon and select drak3d.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>When you log in, if your account is listed as an administrator, you will be +prompted for your password again. Otherwise, use the administrator login +with his/her account. Then you can undo any changes that may have caused the +log in problem.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakauth.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakauth.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..872d2e92 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakauth.xml @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="drakauth" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakauth-ti1">認証</title> + + <subtitle>drakauth</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakauth.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakauth-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakauth</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> enables you to modify the +manner in which you can be recognized as user of the machine or on the net.</para> + + <para>By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file on your +computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you to do so +and give information about that.</para> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakautologin.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakautologin.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..876f9990 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakautologin.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="drakautologin"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakautologin-ti1">自動ログインを設定</title> + + <subtitle>drakautologin</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakautologin-im1" fileref="drakautologin.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakautologin</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to automatically +login the same user, in her/his desktop environment, without asking for any +password. It's called autologin. This is generally a good idea when there +is only one user like to be using the machine.</para> + + <para>It is found under the <emphasis role="bold">Boot</emphasis> tab in the +Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up autologin to automatically log in".</para> + + <para>The interface buttons are pretty obvious:</para> + + <para>Check <guibutton>Launch the graphical environment when your system +starts</guibutton>, if you want X Window System to be executed after the +boot. If not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be +possible to launch the graphic interface manually. This can be done by +launching the command 'startx' or 'systemctl start dm'.</para> + + <para>If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check either +<guibutton>No, I don't want autologin</guibutton>, if you want the system to +continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check +<guibutton>Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop)</guibutton>, if +needed. In this case, you also need to supply the <guilabel>Default +username</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Default desktop</guilabel>.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakboot.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakboot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..00ea47aa --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakboot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,170 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakboot" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakboot-ti1">起動システムを設定</title> + + <subtitle>drakboot</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="drakboot--boot-im1" align="center" fileref="drakboot--boot.png" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If you are using a UEFI system instead of BIOS, the user interface is +slightly different as you cannot choose the boot loader (first drop down +list) since only one is available.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot--boot2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakboot</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to configure the +boot options (choice of the bootloader, set a password, the default boot, +etc.)</para> + + <para>It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labeled "Set up +boot system".</para> + + <warning> + <para>Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing. Changing +some settings may prevent your machine from booting again !</para> + </warning> + + <para>In the first part, called <guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>, it is possible if +using BIOS, to choose which <guibutton>Bootloader to use</guibutton>, Grub, +Grub2 or Lilo, and with a graphical or a text menu. It is just a question +of taste, there are no other consequences. You can also set the +<guibutton>Boot device</guibutton>, don't change anything here unless you +are an expert. The boot device is where the bootloader is installed and any +modification can prevent your machine from booting.</para> + + <para>In UEFI system, the bootloader is <guilabel>Grub2-efi</guilabel> and is +installed in /boot/EFI partition. This FAT32 formatted partition is common +to all operating systems installed.</para> + + <para>In the second part, called <guilabel>Main options</guilabel>, you can set +the <guibutton>Delay before booting default image</guibutton>, in +seconds. During this delay, Grub or Lilo will display the list of available +operating systems, prompting you to make your choice. If no selection is +made, the bootloader will boot the default one once the delay elapses.</para> + + <para>In the third and last part, called <guibutton>Security</guibutton>, it is +possible to set a password.</para> + + <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button gives some extra options.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Enable ACPI:</guibutton></para> + + <para>ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for the +power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this was +the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI +compatible.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Enable SMP:</guibutton></para> + + <para>SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for +multicore processors.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a dual +processor and enable SMP.</para> + </note> + + <para><guibutton>Enable APIC</guibutton> and <guibutton>Enable Local +APIC:</guibutton></para> + + <para>APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are two +components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O +APIC. The latter one routes the interrupts it receives from peripheral buses +to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful +for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC +system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message +"spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local +APIC.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The <guibutton>Next</guibutton> screen differs depending on whether you have +an <emphasis>BIOS</emphasis> or <emphasis>UEFI</emphasis> system.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>You have a <emphasis>BIOS</emphasis> system:</para> + + <para>In this case, you can see the list of all the available entries at boot +time. The default one is asterisked. To change the order of the menu +entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the selected item. If you +click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> or <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> +buttons, a new window appears to add a new entry in the bootloader menu or +to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar with Lilo or Grub to be +able to use these tools.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field is freeform, write here what you want +to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command "title". For +example: Mageia3.</para> + + <para>The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> field contains the kernel name. It matches +the Grub command "kernel". For example /boot/vmlinuz.</para> + + <para>The <guilabel>Root</guilabel> field contains the device name where the +kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command "root". For example (hd0,1).</para> + + <para>The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to +the kernel at boot time.</para> + + <para>If the box <guilabel>Default</guilabel> is checked, Grub will boot this +entry by default.</para> + + <para>In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to +choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>, an <guilabel>initrd</guilabel> +file and a <guilabel>network profile</guilabel>, see <xref +linkend="draknetprofile"/>, in the drop-down lists.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>You have a <emphasis>UEFI</emphasis> system:</para> + + <para>In this case, the drop-down list displays all the available entries; click +on the one wanted as the default one.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to +the kernel at boot time.</para> + + <para>In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to +choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>.</para> + + <para>To set many other parameters, you can use <emphasis>Grub +Customizer</emphasis>, available in the Mageia repositories (see below).</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xreflabel="titi" fileref="drakboot4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakbug.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakbug.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a3892702 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakbug.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section +xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" +xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" +xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" +xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" +xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakbug" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakbug-ti1">Mageia Bug Report Tool</title><subtitle>drakbug</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakbug-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" + fileref="drakbug.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Usually, this tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakbug</emphasis>.</para></footnote> starts automatically +when a Mageia tool crashes. However, it is also possible that, after filing +a bug report, you are asked to start this tool to check some of the +information it gives, and then provide that in that existing bug report.</para> + + <para>If a new bug report needs to be filed and you are not used to doing that, +then please read <link +xlink:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_report_a_bug_properly">How to +report a bug report properly</link> before clicking on the "Report" button.</para> + + <para>In case the bug has already been filed by someone else (the error message +that drakbug gave will be the same, then), it is useful to add a comment to +that existing report that you saw the bug, too.</para> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakbug_report.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakbug_report.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8330f8f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakbug_report.xml @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section +xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" +xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" +xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" +xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" +xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xml:id="drakbug_report" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="drakbug_report-ti1">Collect Logs and System Information for Bug Reports</title><subtitle>drakbug_report</subtitle> + </info> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakbug_report</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can only be started and used +on the command line.</para> + +<para>It is advised to write the output of this command to a file, for instance by +doing <emphasis role="bold">drakbug_report > drakbugreport.txt</emphasis>, +but make sure you have enough disk space first: the file can easily be +several GBs large.</para> +<note><para>The output is far too large to attach to a bug report without first removing +the unneeded parts.</para></note> + <para>This command collects the following information on your system:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para> lspci</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> pci_devices</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> dmidecode</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> fdisk</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> scsi</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> /sys/bus/scsi/devices</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> lsmod</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> cmdline</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> pcmcia: stab</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> usb</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> partitions</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> cpuinfo</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> syslog</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> Xorg.log</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> monitor_full_edid</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> stage1.log</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> ddebug.log</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> install.log</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> fstab</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> modprobe.conf</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> lilo.conf</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> grub: menu.lst</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> grub: install.sh</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> grub: device.map</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> xorg.conf</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> urpmi.cfg</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> modprobe.preload</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> sysconfig/i18n</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> /proc/iomem</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> /proc/ioport</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> mageia version</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> rpm -qa</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> df</para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + + <note><para>At the time this help page was written, the "syslog" part of this command's +output was empty, because this tool had not yet been adjusted to our switch +to systemd. If it is still empty, you can retrieve the "syslog" by doing (as +root) <emphasis role="bold"> journalctl -a > journalctl.txt</emphasis>. If +you don't have a lot of diskspace, you can, for instance, take the last 5000 +lines of the log instead with: <emphasis role="bold">journalctl -a | tail +-n5000 > journalctl5000.txt</emphasis>.</para></note> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakclock.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakclock.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c3f7911c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakclock.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="drakclock"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakclock-ti1">日付と時間の管理</title> + + <subtitle>drakclock</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakclock.png" xml:id="drakclock-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakclock</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the tab System +in the Mageia Control Center labelled <guilabel>"Manage date and +time"</guilabel>. In some desktop environments it is also available by a +right click / Adjust date and Time ... on the clock in the system tray.</para> + + <para>It's a very simple tool.</para> + + <para>On the upper left part, is the <emphasis role="bold">calendar</emphasis>. On +the screenshot above, the date is September (on the upper left), 2012 (on +the upper right), the 2nd (in blue) and it is a Sunday. Select the month +(or year) by clicking on the little arrows on each side of September (or +2012). Select the day by clicking on its number.</para> + + <para>On the bottom left is the <emphasis role="bold">Network Time +Protocol</emphasis> synchronising, it is possible to have a clock always on +time by synchronising it with a server. Check <guilabel>Enable Network Time +Protocol</guilabel> and choose the closest server.</para> + + <para>On the right part is the <emphasis role="bold">clock</emphasis>. It's +useless to set the clock if NTP is enabled. Three boxes display hours, +minutes and seconds (15, 28 and 22 on the screenshot). Use the little arrows +to set the clock to the correct time. The format can't be changed here, see +your desktop environment settings for that.</para> + + <para>At least, on the bottom right, select your time zone by clicking on the +<guibutton>Change Time Zone</guibutton> button and choosing in the list the +nearest town.</para> + + <note> + <para>Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this tool, they +will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the localisation +settings.</para> + </note> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakconnect--del.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakconnect--del.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b2ed3df7 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakconnect--del.xml @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakconnect--del" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakconnect--del-ti1">接続を削除</title><subtitle>drakconnect --del</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakconnect--del-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect--del.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Here, you can delete a network interface<footnote><para>You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakconnect --del</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote>.</para> + <para>Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then +click <emphasis>next</emphasis>.</para> + <para>You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted +successfully.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakconnect.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakconnect.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..921a4367 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakconnect.xml @@ -0,0 +1,808 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="drakconnect"> + <info annotations="simonnzg listened to Aicha by Khaled & Faudel whilst editing this document."> + <title xml:id="drakconnect-ti1">新しいネットワークインターフェースを設定 (LAN, ISDN, ADSL など)</title> + + <subtitle>drakconnect</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakconnect-im1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>序文</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakconnect</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows to configure much of +local network or Internet access. You have to know some information from +your access provider or your network administrator.</para> + + <para>Select the type of connection you want to set, according to which hardware +and provider you have.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Wired connection (Ethernet)</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The first window lists the interfaces which are available. Select the one +to configure.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP +address.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Automatic IP</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers +are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained +below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, +the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. +The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option +<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers +have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address +from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the DHCP client</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>DHCP timeout</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server +requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP +address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection +configurations are explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>手動設定</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS +servers to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no +HOSTNAME is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is +attributed by default.</para> + + <para>For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like +<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is +<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are +available from your service provider's website.</para> + + <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search +domain</emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your +computer is called "splash", and it's full domain name is +"splash.boatanchor.net", the Search Domain would be "boatanchor.net". Unless +you specifically need it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, +domestic ADSL would not need this setting.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect30.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Satellite connection (DVB)</title> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Cable modem connection</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The first window lists the interfaces which are available. Select the one +to configure.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP +address.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>You have to specify a authentication method:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>なし</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>BPALogin (necessary for Telstra). In this case you have to provide User name +and password.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Automatic IP</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers +are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained +below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, +the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. +The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option +<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers +have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address +from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the DHCP client</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>DHCP timeout</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server +requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP +address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection +configurations are explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>手動設定</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS servers +to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME +is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is +attributed by default.</para> + + <para>For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like +<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is +<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are +available from your service provider's website.</para> + + <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search +domain</emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your +computer is called "splash", and it's full domain name is +"splash.boatanchor.net", the Search Domain would be "boatanchor.net". Unless +you specifically need it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, +domestic connection would not need this setting.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect32.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new DSL connection</title> + + <para><orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If the tool detects network interfaces, it offers to select one and to +configure it.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Select one of the protocols available:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>手動による TCP/IP 設定</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>PPP over ADSL (PPPoA)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Point to Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>アクセスの設定</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>アカウントのログイン (ユーザ名)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Account password</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>(Advanced) Virtual Path ID (VPI)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>(Advanced) Virtual Circuit ID (VCI)</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new ISDN connection</title> + + <para><orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The wizard asks which device to configure:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Manual choice (internal ISDN card)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>外付 ISDN モデム</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of hardware is proposed, classified by category and +manufacturer. Select your card.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Select one of the protocols available:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Protocol for the rest of the world, except Europe (DHCP)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Protocol for Europe (EDSS1)</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of providers is then offered, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave +you. Then it is asked for parameters:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>接続名</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>電話番号</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>ログイン ID</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Account password</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>認証方法</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>After that, you have to select if you get the IP address by automatic or +manual method. In the last case, specify IP address and Subnet mask.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next step is to choose how DNS servers address are obtained, by +automatic or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to +put:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>ドメイン名</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>First and second DNS Server</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Select if the hostname is set from IP. This option is to select only if you +are sure that your provider is configured to accept it.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next step is to choose how the gateway address is obtained, by automatic +or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to enter the +IP address.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Wireless connection (WiFi)</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>A first window lists the interfaces which are available and an entry for +Windows driver (ndiswrapper). Select the one to configure. Use ndiswrapper +only if the other configuration methods did not work.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>At this step, the choice is given between the different access points that +the card has detected.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Specific parameter for the wireless card are to provide:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect31.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Operating mode:</para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Managed</term> + + <listitem> + <para>To access to an existing access point (the most frequent).</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Ad-Hoc</term> + + <listitem> + <para>To configure direct connection between computers.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Network Name (ESSID)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Encryption mode: it depends of how the access point is configured.</para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>WPA/WPA2</term> + + <listitem> + <para>This encryption mode is to prefer if your hardware allows it.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>WEP</term> + + <listitem> + <para>Some old hardware deals only this encryption method.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>暗号鍵</para> + + <para>It is generally provided with the hardware which give the access point.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>At this step, the choice is given between an automatic IP address or a +manual IP address.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Automatic IP</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers are +declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained +below. In the last case, IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is +specified, the name localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. The +Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option +<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the DHCP client</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>DHCP timeout</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS servers</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server +requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP +address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>After accepting the configuration the step, which is common to all +connection configurations, is explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>手動設定</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to declare DNS servers. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, +the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default.</para> + + <para>For a residential network, the IP address always looks like +<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is +<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are +available from your providers website.</para> + + <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search +domain</emphasis>. It must seem to your hostname without the first name, +before the period.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new GPRS/Edge/3G connection</title> + + <para><orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If the tool detects wireless interfaces, it offers to select one and to +configure it.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The PIN is asked. Leave empty if the PIN is not required.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Provide access settings</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>アクセスポイント名</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>アカウントのログイン (ユーザ名)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Account password</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Bluetooth Dial-Up Networking connection</title> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Analog telephone modem connection (POTS)</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The wizard asks which device to configure:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>手動選択</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Detected hardware, if any.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of ports is proposed. Select your port.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If not yet installed, it will be suggested that you install the package +<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider +gave. Then it is asked for Dialup options:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Connection name</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Phone number</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Login ID</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Password</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Authentication</emphasis>, choose between:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>PAP/CHAP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>スクリプトを使う認証</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>PAP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>ターミナルからの認証</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>CHAP</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakconnect-end"> + <title>Ending the configuration</title> + + <para>In the next step, you can specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Allow users to manage the connection</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Start the connection at boot</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Enable traffic accounting</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>In the case of a wireless connection, a supplemental box is <emphasis>Allow +access point roaming</emphasis> which give the possibility to switch +automatically between access point according to the signal strength.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>With the advanced button, you can specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Metric (10 by default)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>MTU</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Network Hotplugging</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>IPv6 to IPv4 トンネルを有効にする</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>The last step allows you to specify if the connection is to start +immediately or not.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect9.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakconsole.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakconsole.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0bff7ff4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakconsole.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="drakconsole"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakconsole-ti1">管理者権限でコンソールを開く</title> + + <subtitle>drakconsole</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakconsole-im1" fileref="drakconsole.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakconsole</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> gives you access to a console +which is directly opened as root. We do not think that you need more +information about that.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakdisk.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakdisk.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0cd67b39 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakdisk.xml @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="drakdisk"> + + + <info> + <title xml:id="drakdisk-ti1">ディスクパーティションを管理</title> + + <subtitle>drakdisk or diskdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskBackup-im1" revision="1" fileref="drakdiskBackup.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <warning> + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakdisk</emphasis> or <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is very powerful, a tiny +error or a cat jumping on your keyboard can lead to losing all data on a +partition or even to erasing the entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll +see the screen above on top of the tool screen. Click on +<emphasis>Exit</emphasis> if you're not sure you want to continue.</para> + </warning> + + <para>If you have more than one hard disk, you can switch to the hard disk you +want to work on by selecting the correct tab (sda, sdb, sdc etc).</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="drakdisk-im1" fileref="drakdisk.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>You can choose from many actions to adjust your hard disk to your +preferences. Wiping an entire hard disk, splitting or merging partitions, +resizing them or changing the filesystem, formatting or viewing what is in a +partition: it is all possible. The <emphasis><guibutton>Clear +all</guibutton></emphasis> button at the bottom is to erase the complete +disk, the other buttons become visible on the right after you click on a +partition.</para> + + + + <!-- 2015-07-06 Note added by Lebarhon --> +<note> + <para>If you have an UEFI system, you can see a small partition called "EFI System +Partition" and mounted on /boot/EFI. Never delete it, because it contains +all your different operating systems bootloaders.</para> + </note> + + <para>If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you cannot +choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the partition +must be unmounted first.</para> + + <para>It is only possible to resize a partition on its right side</para> + + <para>To change a partition type (change ext3 to ext4 for example) you have to +delete the partition and then re-create it with the new type. The button +<guibutton role="bold">Create</guibutton> appears when a disk empty part is +selected</para> + + <para>You can choose a mount point that doesn't exist, it will be created.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskMountedPartition-im1" revision="1" fileref="drakdiskMountedPartition.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Selecting <emphasis><guibutton>Toggle to expert mode</guibutton></emphasis> +gives some extra available actions, like labeling the partition, as can be +seen in the screenshot below.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakdiskExpertUnmounted-im1" align="center" fileref="drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakedm.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakedm.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3e468f66 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakedm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakedm" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + + + <!--2012-09-03 marja: changed title to the title of this screen in MCC --> +<title xml:id="drakedm-ti1">ディスプレイマネージャの設定</title> + + <subtitle>drakedm</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakedm-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakedm.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="drakedm-pa1">Here<footnote> + <para revision="1" xml:id="drakedm-pa3">You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakedm</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> you can choose which display +manager to use to log into your desktop environment. Only the ones available +on your system will be shown.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="drakedm-pa2">Most users will only notice that the provided login screens look +different. However, there are differences in supported features, too. LXDM +is a lightweight display manager, KDM and GDM have more extras.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakfirewall.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakfirewall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..928eb2ee --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakfirewall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakfirewall" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakfirewall-ti1">個人用ファイアウォールの設定</title> + + <subtitle>drakfirewall</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakfirewall.png" align="center" xml:id="drakfirewall-im1" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakfirewall</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the Security +tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up your personal +firewall". It is the same tool in the first tab of "Configure system +security, permissions and audit".</para> + + <para>A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming +connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the +first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection +attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box - +<guilabel>Everything (no firewall)</guilabel> - unless you want to disable +the firewall, and only check the needed services.</para> + + <para>It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on +<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and a new window is opened. In the field +<guilabel>Other ports</guilabel>, enter the needed ports following these +examples :</para> + + <para>80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol</para> + + <para>24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp protocol</para> + + <para>The listed ports should be separated by a space.</para> + + <para>If the box <guilabel>Log firewall messages in system logs</guilabel> is +checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <note> + <para>If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file sharing, ...) +it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it is even +recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the internet.</para> + </note> + + <para>The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These feature +allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first box +<guilabel>Use Interactive Firewall </guilabel>is checked. Check the second +box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure +somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards +corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot +below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to be +warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports.</para> + + <para>These warning are given by alert popups through the network applet.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to the +Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the necessary +packages are downloaded.</para> + + <tip> + <para>If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network & +Internet, icon Set up a new network interface.</para> + </tip> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakfont.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakfont.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ce1d543 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakfont.xml @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="drakfont"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakfont-ti1">フォントの管理・追加・削除と Windows® フォントのインポート</title> + + <subtitle>drakfont</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakfont-im1" fileref="drakfont.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakfont</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the <emphasis role="bold">System</emphasis> tab. It +allows you to manage the fonts available on the computer. The main screen +above shows:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>the installed font names, styles and sizes.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>a preview of the selected font.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>some buttons explained here later.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Get Windows Fonts: </emphasis></para> + + <para>This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows partition. You +must have Microsoft Windows installed.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Options:</emphasis></para> + + <para>It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly) able +to use the fonts.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Uninstall:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place. Be +careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on the +documents that use them.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Import:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The +supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the +<emphasis role="bold">Import</emphasis> button and then on <emphasis +role="bold">Add</emphasis>, a file manager pops up where you can select the +fonts to install, click on <emphasis role="bold">Install</emphasis> when +done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts.</para> + + <para>If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the Drakfont +main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakguard.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakguard.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..144afc88 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakguard.xml @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="drakguard"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakguard-ti1">パレンタルコントロール</title> + + <subtitle>drakguard</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakguard.png" revision="1" xml:id="drakguard-im1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakguard</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found in the Mageia +Control Center, under the Security tab, labelled <guilabel>Parental +Control</guilabel>. If you don't see this label, you have to install the +drakguard package (not installed by default).</para> + + <section> + <title>Presentation</title> + + <para>Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your computer to +restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard has three +useful capabilities:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It does this by +controlling the shorewall firewall built into Mageia.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so these users can +only execute what you accept them to execute.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through +blacklists/whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of the +website. To achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource parental +control blocker DansGuardian.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Configuring Parental controls</title> + + <para><warning> + <para>If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are formatted in Ext2, +Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up offering to configure ACL on +your partitions. ACL stands for Access Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel +feature that allows access to individual files to be restricted to named +users. ACL is built into Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by +an option in Ext2, Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to this +prompt drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and will +then suggest you reboot.</para> + </warning><guibutton>Enable parental control</guibutton>: If checked, the parental +control is enabled and the access to <guilabel>Block programs</guilabel> tab +is opened.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Block all network traffic</guibutton>: If checked, all the +websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise, all +the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab.</para> + + <para><guibutton>User access</guibutton>: Users on the left hand side will have +their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on the +right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the computer are +not inconvenienced. Select a user in the left hand side and click on +<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to add him/her as an allowed user. Select an +user in the right hand side and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to +remove him/her from the allowed users.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Time control:</guibutton> If checked, internet access is allowed +with restrictions between the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> time and +<guilabel>End</guilabel> time. It is totally blocked outside these time +window.</para> + + <section> + <title>Blacklist/Whitelist tab</title> + + <para>Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on the +<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Block Programs Tab</title> + + <para><guibutton>Block Defined Applications</guibutton>: Enables the use of ACL to +restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to the +applications you wish to block.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Unblock Users list</guibutton>: Users listed on the right hand +side will not be subject to acl blocking.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakgw.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakgw.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6216ec5f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakgw.xml @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="drakgw" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakgw-ti1">他のローカルマシンとインターネット接続を共有</title> + + <subtitle>drakgw</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakgw.png" format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="drakgw-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-principles"> + <title>Principles</title> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../drakgw-net.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>This is useful when you have a +computer (3) which has Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local +network (1). You can use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to +other workstations (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the +gateway must have two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card +must be connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to +the Internet (2).</para> + + <para>The first step is to verify that the network and the access to Internet are +set up, as documented in <xref linkend="draknetcenter"/>.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-wizard"> + <title>Gateway wizard</title> + + <para>The wizard<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakgw</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> offers successive steps +which are shown below:</para> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it warns about this +and asks to stop the network and configure the hardware.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The wizard +automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should verify that +what is proposed is correct.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard also proposes +one, check that this is correct.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP address, mask +and domain name. Check that these parameters are compatible with the actual +configuration. It is recommended that you accept these values.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes, the wizard +will check that <code>bind</code> is installed. Otherwise, you have to +specify the address of a DNS server.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes, the wizard +will check that <code>dhcp-server</code> is installed and offer to configure +it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP range.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If yes, the wizard +will check that <code>squid</code> is installed and offer to configure it, +with the address of the administrator (admin@mydomain.com), name of the +proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom), the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is connected to +printers and to share them.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <para>You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is active.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-configure"> + <title>Configure the client</title> + + <para>If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need to +specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address +automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when connecting +to the network. This method is valid whatever operating system the client is +using.</para> + + <para>If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in particular +specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine acting as the +gateway.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-stop"> + <title>Stop connection sharing</title> + + <para>If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer, launch +the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop the +sharing.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakhosts.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakhosts.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..45aa9935 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakhosts.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakhosts" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakhosts-ti1">ホストの定義</title> + + <subtitle>drakhosts</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="drakhosts.png" format="PNG" xml:id="drakhosts-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed +IP-addresses, this tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakhosts</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows to +specify a name to access them more easily. Then you can use that name +instead of the IP-address.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Add</guibutton></para> + + <para>With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a window +to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and optionally an +alias which can be used in the same way that the name is.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Modify</guibutton></para> + + <para>You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get the +same window.</para> + + <para/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakinvictus.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakinvictus.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c19a7da2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakinvictus.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakinvictus" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakinvictus-ti1">ネットワークインターフェースとファイアウォールの高度な設定</title><subtitle>drakinvictus</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakinvictus-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakinvictus.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakinvictus</emphasis> as root.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/draknetcenter.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/draknetcenter.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..43f50f50 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/draknetcenter.xml @@ -0,0 +1,220 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draknetcenter" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + + + + <info> + <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-31 +Write some text means i can't do it :( +What must we say about networks out of wired (Ethernet) and wireless (WI fi) like GPRS, bluetooth ? I can't write anything. +--> +<!-- --> +<title xml:id="draknetcenter-ti1">ネットワークセンター</title> + + <subtitle>draknetcenter</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" fileref="draknetcenter.png" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="draknetcenter-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draknetcenter</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the Network +& Internet tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Network Center"</para> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>序文</title> + + <para>When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks +configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless, satellite, +etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons appear, depending +on the network type, to allow you to look after the network, change its +settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't intended to create a +network, for this see <guilabel>Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, +ADSL, ...)</guilabel> in the same MCC tab.</para> + + <para>In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks, the +first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon <inlinemediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterEthernet-on.png"/> + </imageobject> + </inlinemediaobject> (this one is not connected<inlinemediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterEthernet-off.png"/> + </imageobject> + </inlinemediaobject> ) and the second section shows wireless +networks, not connected recognizable by this icon <inlinemediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterWireless-off.png"/> + </imageobject> + </inlinemediaobject> and this one <inlinemediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterWireless-on.png"/> + </imageobject> + </inlinemediaobject>if connected. For the other network types, +the colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not +connected.</para> + + <para>In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the detected +networks, with the <guilabel>SSID</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Signal +strengh</guilabel>, if they are encrypted (in red) or not (in green), and +the <guilabel>Operating mode</guilabel>. Click on the chosen one and then +either on <guibutton>Monitor</guibutton>, <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> +or <guibutton>Connect</guibutton>. It is possible here to go from a network +to another one. If a private network is selected, the Network Settings +window (see below) will open and ask you for extra settings ( an encryption +key in particular).</para> + + <para>Click on <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> to update the screen.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The Monitor button</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads (toward the +PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The same screen is +available by right clicking on the <guimenu>Internet icon in the system tray +-> Monitor Network</guimenu>.</para> + + <para>There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo the +local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection which +gives details about connection status.</para> + + <note> + <para>At the bottom of the window is a title <guilabel>Traffic +accounting</guilabel>, we will look at that in the next section.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The Configure button</title> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">A - For a wired network</emphasis></para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>It is possible to change all the settings given during network +creation. Most of the time, checking <guibutton>Automatic IP</guibutton> +<guibutton>(BOOTP/DHCP)</guibutton> will do, but in case of problems, manual +configuration may give better results.</para> + + <para>For a residential network, the <guilabel>IP address</guilabel> always looks +like 192.168.0.x, <guilabel>Netmask</guilabel> is 255.255.255.0, and the +<guilabel>Gateway</guilabel> and <guilabel>DNS servers</guilabel> are +available from your providers website.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Enable traffic accounting</guibutton> if checked this will count +the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results are visible in +the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once enabled, you may +have to reconnect to the network.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow interface to be controlled by Network +Manager:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">B - For a wireless network</emphasis></para> + + <para>Only the items not already seen above are explained.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Operating mode:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Select <guilabel>Managed</guilabel> if the connection is via an access +point, there is an <emphasis role="bold">ESSID</emphasis> detected. Select +<guilabel>Ad-hoc</guilabel> if it is a peer to peer network. Select +<emphasis role="bold">Master</emphasis> if your network card is used as the +access point, your network card needs to support this mode.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Encryption mode and Encryption key:</emphasis></para> + + <para>If it is a private network, you need to know these settings.</para> + + <para><guilabel>WEP</guilabel> uses a password and is weaker than WPA which uses a +passphrase. <guilabel>WPA Pre-Shared Key</guilabel> is also called WPA +personal or WPA home. <guilabel>WPA Enterprise</guilabel> is not often used +in private networks.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow access point roaming</emphasis>:</para> + + <para>Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its access +point while remaining connected to the network.</para> + + <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The Advanced Settings button</title> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/draknetprofile.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/draknetprofile.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6878ba6f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/draknetprofile.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draknetprofile" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draknetprofile-ti1">ネットワークプロファイルを管理</title><subtitle>draknetprofile</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="draknetprofile-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="draknetprofile.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draknetprofile</emphasis> as root.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/draknfs.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/draknfs.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..02375494 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/draknfs.xml @@ -0,0 +1,165 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="draknfs" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draknfs-ti1">NFS を使ってドライブ/ディレクトリを共有</title> + + <subtitle>draknfs</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>Prerequisites</title> + + <para>When the wizard<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draknfs</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is launched for the +first time, it may display the following message:</para> + + <blockquote> + <para>The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to install it?</para> + </blockquote> + + <para>After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is displayed.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Main window</title> + + <para>A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step, the list +is empty. The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button gives access to a +configuration tool.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>エントリを変更</title> + + <para>The configuration tool is labeled "Modify entry". It may be also launched +with the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. The following parameters are +available.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs4.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im4"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>NFS Directory</title> + + <para>Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The +<guibutton>Directory</guibutton> button gives access to a browser to choose +it.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>ホストアクセス</title> + + <para>Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the shared +directory.</para> + + <para>NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways:</para> + + <para><emphasis>single host</emphasis>: a host either by an abbreviated name +recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP address</para> + + <para><emphasis>netgroups</emphasis>: NIS netgroups may be given as @group.</para> + + <para><emphasis>wildcards</emphasis>: machine names may contain the wildcard +characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all hosts in the +domain cs.foo.edu.</para> + + <para><emphasis>IP networks</emphasis>: you can also export directories to all +hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either +`/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>ユーザ ID マッピング</title> + + <para><emphasis>map root user as anonymous</emphasis>: maps requests from uid/gid +0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user from the client +cannot read or write to the files on the server which are created by root on +the server itself.</para> + + <para><emphasis>allow real remote root access</emphasis>: turn off root +squashing. This option is mainly useful for diskless clients +(no_root_squash).</para> + + <para><emphasis>map all users to anonymous user</emphasis>: maps all uids and gids +to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for NFS-exported public FTP +directories, news spool directories, etc. The opposite option is no user UID +mapping (no_all_squash), which is the default setting.</para> + + <para><emphasis>anonuid and anongid</emphasis>: explicitly set the uid and gid of +the anonymous account.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>上級オプション</title> + + <para><emphasis>Secured Connection</emphasis>: this option requires that requests +originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024). This option +is on by default.</para> + + <para><emphasis>Read-Only share</emphasis>: allow either only read or both read +and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to disallow any +request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made explicit by +using this option.</para> + + <para><emphasis>Synchronous access</emphasis>: prevents the NFS server from +violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any changes made +by these requests have been committed to stable storage (e.g. disc drive).</para> + + <para><emphasis>Subtree checking</emphasis>: enable subtree checking which can +help improve security in some cases, but can decrease reliability. See +exports(5) man page for more details.</para> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Menu entries</title> + + <para>So far the list has at least one entry.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs5.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im5"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>File|Write conf</title> + + <para>Save the current configuration.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>NFS Server|Restart</title> + + <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>NFS Server|Reload</title> + + <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration +files.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakproxy.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakproxy.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2d3f2b40 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakproxy.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="drakproxy" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakproxy-ti1">プロクシ</title> + + <subtitle>drakproxy</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakproxy.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakproxy-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can use +this tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakproxy</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> to configure it. Your net +administrator will give you the information you need. You can also specify +some services which can be accessed without the proxy by exception.</para> + + <para>From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer networks, a +proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts as +an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other +servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, +such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a +different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to +simplify and control their complexity.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakrpm-edit-media.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakrpm-edit-media.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c24588a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakrpm-edit-media.xml @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-ti1">Configure Media</title> + + <subtitle>drakrpm-edit-media</subtitle> + </info> + + + + + + <mediaobject> + <!-- 2013-01-06 marja - added Qilaq's and spturtle's corrections --> +<!--2013-10-22 marja - improved wording, thanks to Aragorn :-) + - adjusted "Add" part to changed behaviour of this tool + (no longer a choice to only add "update sources" is + given) --> +<imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-im1" fileref="drakrpm-edit-media.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para><important> + <para>First thing to do after an install is to add software sources (also known as +repositories, media, mirrors). That means you must select the media sources +to be used to install and update packages and applications. (see Add button +below).</para> + </important> <note> + <para>If you install (or upgrade) Mageia using an optical media (DVD or CD) or a +USB device, there will be a software source configured to the optical media +used. To avoid being asked to insert the media when you install new +packages, you should disable (or delete) this media. (It will have the +media type CD-Rom).</para> + </note> <note> + <para>Your system is running under an architecture which may be 32-bit (called +i586), or 64-bit (called x86_64). Some packages are independent of whether +your system is 32-bit or 64-bit; these are called noarch packages. They +don't have their own noarch directories on the mirrors, but are all in both +the i586 and the x86_64 media.</para> + </note></para> + + <para>This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis +role="bold">Software management.</emphasis><footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote></para> + + <section> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-columns">The columns</title> + + <bridgehead>Column Enable:</bridgehead> + + <para>The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious with +some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system unusable.</para> + + <bridgehead>Column Update:</bridgehead> + + <para>The checked media will be used to update packages, it must be enabled. Only +media with "Update" in its name should be selected. For security reasons, +this column isn't modifiable in this tool, you must open a console as root +and type <emphasis role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media --expert.</emphasis></para> + + <bridgehead>Column medium:</bridgehead> + + <para>Display the medium name. Mageia official repositories for final release +versions contain at least:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Core</emphasis> which contains most programs available +supported by Mageia.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis> which contains some programs which +are not free</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Tainted</emphasis> free software for which there might +be patent claims in some countries.</para> + + <para>Each medium has 4 sub-sections:</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Release</emphasis> the packages as of the day the this +version of Mageia was released.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Updates</emphasis> the packages updated since release +due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have this medium enabled, +even with a very slow internet connection.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Backports</emphasis> some packages of new versions +backported from Cauldron (the next version under development).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Testing</emphasis> which is used for temporary tests +of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA team to validate the +corrections.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-right-button">The buttons on the right</title> + + <para><guibutton>Remove:</guibutton></para> + + <para>To remove a medium, click on it and then on this button. It is wise to +remove the medium used for the installation (CD or DVD for example) since +all the packages it contains are in the official Core release medium.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Edit:</guibutton></para> + + <para>Allows you to modify the selected medium settings, (URL, downloader and +proxy).</para> + + <para><guibutton>Add:</guibutton></para> + + <para>Add the official repositories available on the Internet. These repositories +contain only safe and well tested software. Clicking on the "Add" button +adds the mirrorlist to your configuration, it is designed to make sure that +you install and update from a mirror close to you. If you prefer to choose a +specific mirror, then add it by choosing "Add a specific media mirror" from +the drop-down "File" menu.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Up and down arrows:</guibutton></para> + + <para>Change the list order. When Drakrpm looks for a package, it reads the list +in the displayed order and will install the first package found for the same +release number - in the event of a version mismatch, the latest release will +be installed. So if possible, put the fastest repositories at the top.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-menu">The menu</title> + + <para><guimenu>File -> Update:</guimenu></para> + + <para>A window pops up with the media list. Select the ones you want to update and +click on the <guibutton>Update</guibutton> button.</para> + + <para><guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror:</guimenu></para> + + <para>Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example it's +too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select all the +actual media and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to take them +out. Click on <guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror</guimenu>, choose +between update only or the full set (if you do not know, choose the +<guibutton>Full set of sources</guibutton>) and accept the contact by +clicking on <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. This window opens:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakrpmEditMedia2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one very +close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the available +mirrors in that country. Select one and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para> + + <para><guimenu>File -> Add a custom medium:</guimenu></para> + + <para>It is possible to install a new media (from a third party for example) that +isn't supported by Mageia. A new window appears:</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>Select the medium type, find a smart +name that well define the medium and give the URL (or the path, according to +the medium type)</para> + + <para><guimenu>Options -> Global options:</guimenu></para> + + <para>This item allows you to choose when to "Verify RPMs to be installed" (always +or never), the download program (curl, wget or aria2) and to define the +download policy for information about the packages (on demand -by default-, +update only, always or never).</para> + + <para><guimenu>Options -> Manage keys:</guimenu></para> + + <para>To guarantee a high level of security, digital keys are used to authenticate +the media. It is possible for each medium to allow or disallow a key. In the +window that appear, select a medium and then click on +<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to allow a new key or to select a key and click +on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to disallow that key.</para> + + <para><warning> + <para>Do this with care, as with all security-related questions</para> + </warning><guimenu>Options -> Proxy:</guimenu></para> + + <para>If you need to use a proxy server for internet access, you can configure it +here. You only need to give the <guibutton>Proxy hostname</guibutton> and if +necessary a <guilabel>Username</guilabel> and <guilabel>Password</guilabel>.</para> + + <para/> + + <para>For more information about configuring the media, see <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Software_management">the Mageia Wiki +page</link>.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/draksambashare.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/draksambashare.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..baa2b5bd --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/draksambashare.xml @@ -0,0 +1,251 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="draksambashare" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksambashare-ti1">Share directories and drives with Samba</title> + + <subtitle>draksambashare</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="draksambashare-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>序文</title> + + <para>Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share some +resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to configure +the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This protocol is +also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can access the +resources of the Samba server.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Preparation</title> + + <para>To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a fixed IP +address. This can be specified directly on the server, for example with +<xref linkend="draknetcenter-ti1"/>, or at the DHCP server which identifies +the station with its MAC-address and give it always the same address. The +firewall has also to allow the incoming requests to the Samba server.</para> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Wizard - Standalone server</title> + + <para>At the first run, the tools <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing<emphasis +role="bold"> draksambashare</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> checks if +needed packages are installed and proposes to install them if they are not +yet present. Then the wizard to configure the Samba server is launched.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare0.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="draksambashare0-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already +selected.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare1.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="draksambashare1-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same for the +access to the shared resources.</para> + + <para>The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the server on +the network.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare2.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="draksambashare2-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Choose the security mode:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>user</guilabel>: the client must be authorized to access the +resource</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>share</guilabel>: the client authenticates itself separately for +each share</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources, with IP +address or host name.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare3.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare3-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be +described in the Windows workstations.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare4.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="draksambashare-im4"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the next step.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare5.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="draksambashare-im5"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept the +configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in +<code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare6.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="draksambashare-im6"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Wizard - Primary domain controller</title> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare13.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>If the "Primary domain controller" +option is selected, the wizard asks for indication if Wins is to support or +not and to provide admin users names. The following steps are then the same +as for standalone server, except you can choose also the security mode:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>domain</guilabel>: provides a mechanism for storing all user and +group accounts in a central, shared, account repository. The centralized +account repository is shared between (security) controllers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Declare a directory to share</title> + + <para>With the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, we get:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare15.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare-im7"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the +<guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. Options can be edited, such as whether +the directory is visible to the public, writable or browseable. The share +name can not be modified.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare16.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="draksambashare-im8"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Menu entries</title> + + <para>When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be used.</para> + + <formalpara> + <title>File|Write conf</title> + + <para>Save the current configuration in <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara> + <title>Samba server|Configure</title> + + <para>The wizard can be run again with this command.</para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara> + <title>Samba server|Restart</title> + + <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files.</para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara> + <title>Samba Server|Reload</title> + + <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration +files.</para> + </formalpara> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Printers share</title> + + <para>Samba also allows you to share printers.</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare17.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Samba users</title> + + <para>In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared +resources when authentication is required. You can add users from <xref +linkend="userdrake-ti1"/><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare18.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/draksec.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/draksec.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..84de8c0d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/draksec.xml @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="draksec"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksec-ti1">Mageia ツールの認証を設定</title> + + <subtitle>draksec</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="draksec-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="draksec0.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draksec</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote>is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Security</emphasis></para> + + <para>It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish tasks +usually done by the administrator.</para> + + <para>Click on the little arrow before the item you want to drop down: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksec.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed in +the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool, a +drop down list on the right side gives the choice between:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Default: The launch mode depends on the chosen security level. See in the +same MCC tab, the tool "Configure system security, permissions and audit".</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>User password: The user password is asked before the tool launching.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Administrator password: The root password is asked before the tool launching</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>No password: The tool is launched without asking any password.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/draksnapshot-config.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/draksnapshot-config.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7f3b0d94 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/draksnapshot-config.xml @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xml:id="draksnapshot-config" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksnapshot-config-ti1">スナップショット</title> + <subtitle>draksnapshot-config</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="draksnapshot-config-im1" revision="1" align="center" + format="PNG" fileref="draksnapshot-config.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draksnapshot-config </emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is available in MCC's +<guilabel>System</guilabel> tab, in the <guilabel>Administration +tools</guilabel> section.</para> + <para>When you start this tool in MCC for the first time, you will see a message +about installing draksnapshot. Click on <guibutton>Install</guibutton> to +proceed. Draksnapshot and some other packages it needs will be installed.</para> + + <para>Click again on <guilabel>Snapshots</guilabel>, you will see the +<guilabel>Settings</guilabel> screen. Tick <guilabel>Enable +Backups</guilabel> and, if you want to backup the whole system, +<guilabel>Backup the whole system</guilabel>.</para> + <para>If you only want to backup part of your directories, then choose +<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>. You will see a little pop-up screen. Use the +<guibutton>Add</guibutton> and <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> buttons next to +the <guilabel>Backup list</guilabel> to include or exclude directories and +files from the backup. Use the same buttons next to the +<guilabel>Exclude</guilabel> list to remove subdirectories and/or files from +the chosen directories, that should <emphasis role="bold">not</emphasis> be +included in the backup. Click on <guibutton>Close</guibutton> when you are +done.</para> + <para>Now give the path to <guilabel>Where to backup</guilabel>, or choose the +<guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select the correct path. Any mounted +USB-key or external HD can be found in <emphasis +role="bold">/run/media/your_user_name/</emphasis>. + </para> + <para>Click on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> to make the snapshot.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/draksound.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/draksound.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a30236c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/draksound.xml @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draksound" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksound-ti1">サウンドの設定</title> + + <subtitle>draksound</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="draksound-im1" fileref="draksound.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draksound</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>Draksound deals with the sound configuration, including the driver choice, +PulseAudio options and trouble shooting. It will help you if you experience +sound problems or if you change the sound card.</para> + + <para>The drop down list called <guilabel>Driver</guilabel> allows you to select a +driver from all the ones available on the computer that match the sound +card.</para> + + <note> + <para>Most of the time, it is possible to choose a driver using the OSS or ALSA +API. OSS is the oldest and very basic, we recommend to choose ALSA when +possible for its enhanced features.</para> + </note> + + <para><guilabel>PulseAudio</guilabel> is a sound server. It receives all the sound +inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the resulting +sound to the output. See <guimenu>Menu ->Sound and video -> PulseAudio +volume control</guimenu> to set these preferences.</para> + + <para>PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave it +enabled.</para> + + <para><guilabel>Glitch-Free</guilabel> improves PulseAudio with some programs. It +is also recommended to leave it enabled.</para> + + <para>The button <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> display a new window with two or +three buttons:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="Draksound1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The first button gives total freedom of choice. You have to know what you +are doing. This button is not available when the system has found a driver +for your device.</para> + + <para>The second one is obvious and the last one gives assistance with fixing any +problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this before asking +the community for help.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakups.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakups.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8abfcaa6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakups.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakups" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakups-ti1">電源管理のための UPS を設定</title><subtitle>drakups</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakups-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakups.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakups</emphasis> as root.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakvpn.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakvpn.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..70ee2fab --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakvpn.xml @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="drakvpn"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakvpn-ti1">Configure VPN Connection to secure network access</title> + + <subtitle>drakvpn</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakvpn-im1" align="center" fileref="drakvpn1.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>序文</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakvpn</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows to configure secure +access to a remote network establishing a tunnel between the local +workstation and the remote network. We discuss here only of the +configuration on the workstation side. We assume that the remote network is +already in operation, and that you have the connection information from the +network administrator, like a .pcf configuration file .</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>設定</title> + + <para>First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on which +protocol is used for your virtual private network.</para> + + <para>Then give your connection a name.</para> + + <para>At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN connection.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>For Cisco VPN</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakvpn3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be installed the +first time the tool is used.</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakvpn7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>Select the files that you received +from the network administrator.</para> + + <para>Advanced parameters:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakvpn8.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN +connection.</para> + + <para>This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network +connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always connect +to this VPN.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_apache2.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_apache2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b0527f02 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_apache2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_apache2" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-ti1">Configure webserver</title><subtitle>drakwizard apache2</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_apache2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up a web +server. + </para> + <section> + <title>What is a web server?</title> + <para> + Web server is the software that helps to deliver web content that can be +accessed through the Internet. (From Wikipedia) + </para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Setting up a web server with drakwizard apache2</title> + <para> + Welcome to the web server wizard. + </para> + <procedure> + <step> + <title>序文</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Exposing the web server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad +things. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Server User Module</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Allows users to create their own sites. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>User web directory name</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + The user needs to create and populate this directory, then the server will +display it. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Server Document Root</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Allows you to configure the path to the web servers default documents. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>まとめ</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>完了</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im8" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_bind.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_bind.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..87bfd912 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_bind.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_bind" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_bind-ti1">DNS を設定</title><subtitle>drakwizard bind</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_bind-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_bind.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard bind</emphasis> as root.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_dhcp.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_dhcp.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..81a98ae2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_dhcp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-ti1">DHCP を設定</title> + + <subtitle>drakwizard dhcp</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im1" fileref="drakwizard_dhcp.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para><note> + <para>This tool is broken in Mageia 4 because of new naming scheme for the Net +interfaces</para> + </note></para> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> can help you to set up a +<acronym>DHCP</acronym> server. It is a component of drakwizard which should +be installed before you can access to it.</para> + + <section> + <title>What is DHCP?</title> + + <para>The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (<acronym>DHCP</acronym>) is a +standardized networking protocol used on IP networks that dynamically +configures IP addresses and other information that is needed for Internet +communication. (From Wikipedia)</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Setting up a DHCP server with drakwizard dhcp</title> + + <para>Welcome to the DHCP server wizard.</para> + + <procedure> + <step> + <title>序文</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Selecting Adaptor</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Choose the network interface, which is connected to the subnet, and for +which DHCP will assign IP addresses, and then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Select IP range</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step3.png" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im4"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Select the beginning and ending IP addresses of the range of IPs you want +the server to offer, along with the IP of the gateway machine connecting to +some place outside the local network, hopefully close to the Internet, then +click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>まとめ</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step4.png" revision="1" align="center" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im5" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Hold on...</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step5.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im6"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This can be fixed. Click <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> a few times and +change things around.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Hours later...</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step6.png" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im7"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section> + <title>What is done</title> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Installing the package dhcp-server if needed;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Saving <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf</code> in <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf.orig;</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Creating a new <code>dhcpd.conf</code> starting from +<code>/usr/share/wizards/dhcp_wizard/scripts/dhcpd.conf.default</code> and +adding the new parameters:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><code>hname</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>dns</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>net</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>ip</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>mask</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>rng1</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>rng2</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>dname</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>gateway</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>tftpserverip</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>dhcpd_interface</code></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Also modifying Webmin configuration file +<code>/etc/webmin/dhcpd/config</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Restarting <code>dhcpd.</code></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_ntp.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_ntp.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f51fbbe4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_ntp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="drakwizard_ntp" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-ti1">時刻を設定</title> + + <subtitle>drakwizard ntp</subtitle> + </info> + + + + <mediaobject> + <!-- 2013-10-25 Lebarhon - 3 screenshots ready to be added when it is possible --> +<imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard_ntp.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> purpose is to set the time of +your server synchronised with an external server. It isn't installed by +default and you have to also install the drakwizard and drakwizard-base +packages.</para> + + <section> + <title>Setup a NTP server with drakwizard ntp</title> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para>After a welcome screen (see above), the second one ask you to choose three +time servers in the drop down lists and suggests to use pool.ntp.org twice +because this server always points to available time servers.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp2.png"> + <info> +<author> <personname/> </author> <pubdate/></info> + </imagedata> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para>The following screens allows to choose the region and the city and then, you +arrive on a summary. If something is wrong, you can obviously change it +using the <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>button. If everything is right, +click on the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button to proceed to the test. It +may take a while and you finally get this screen below:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para>Click on the <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button to close the tool</para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>What is done</title> + + <para>This tool executes the following steps:</para> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Installing the package <code>ntp</code> if needed</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Saving the files <code>/etc/sysconfig/clock</code> to +<code>/etc/sysconfig/clock.orig</code> and +<code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> to +<code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers.orig</code>;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Writing a new file <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> with the list of +servers;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Modifying the file <code>/etc/ntp.conf</code> by inserting the first server +name;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Stopping and starting <code>crond</code>, <code>atd</code> and +<code>ntpd</code> services;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Setting the hardware clock to the current system time with UTC reference.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_proftpd.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_proftpd.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d42b8fb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_proftpd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-ti1">FTP を設定</title><subtitle>drakwizard proftpd</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_proftpd.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up an +<acronym>FTP</acronym> server. + </para> + <section> + <title>What is <acronym>FTP</acronym>?</title> + <para> + File Transfer Protocol (<acronym>FTP</acronym>) is a standard network +protocol used to transfer files from one host to another host over a +<acronym>TCP</acronym>-based network, such as the Internet. (From Wikipedia) + </para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Setting up an FTP server with drakwizard proftpd</title> + <para> + Welcome to the FTP wizard. Buckle up. + </para> + <procedure> + <step> + <title>序文</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Exposing the FTP server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad +things. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Server Information</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Enter name the sever will use to introduce itself, someone to email +complaints too and whether to allow root login access. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Server Options</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Set listening port, jailed user, allow resumes and/or <acronym>FXP</acronym> +(File eXchange Protocol) + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>まとめ</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>完了</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_squid.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_squid.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1c09d034 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_squid.xml @@ -0,0 +1,238 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="drakwizard_squid" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_squid-ti1">プロキシを設定</title> + + <subtitle>drakwizard squid</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard_squid.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard squid</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> can help you to set up a +proxy server. It is a component of drakwizard which should be installed +before you can access to it.</para> + + <section> + <title>What is a proxy server?</title> + + <para>A proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts +as an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other +servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, +such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a +different server and the proxy server evaluates the request as a way to +simplify and control its complexity. (From Wikipedia)</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Setting up a proxy server with drakwizard squid</title> + + <para>Welcome to the proxy server wizard.</para> + + <procedure> + <step> + <title>序文</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step1.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im2"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Selecting the proxy port</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step2.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im3"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Select the proxy port browsers will connect through, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Set Memory and Disk Usage</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step3.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im4"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Set memory and disk cache limits, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Select Network Access Control</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step4.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im5"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Set visibility to local network or world, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Grant Network Access</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step5.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im6"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Grant access to local networks, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Use Upper Level Proxy Server?</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step6.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im7"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Cascade through another proxy server? If no, skip next step.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Upper Level Proxy URL and Port</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step7.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im8"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Provide upper level proxy hostname and port, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>まとめ</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step8.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im9"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Start during boot?</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step9.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im10"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Choose if the proxy server should be started during the boot time, then +click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>完了</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step10.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im11"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section> + <title>What is done</title> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Installing the package squid if needed;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Saving <code>/etc/squid/squid.conf</code> in +<code>/etc/squid/squid.conf.orig;</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Creating a new <code>squid.conf</code> starting from +<code>squid.conf.default</code> and adding the new parameters:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><code>cache_dir</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>localnet</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>cache_mem</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>http_port</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>level</code> 1, 2 or 3 and <code>http_access</code> according to level</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>cache_peer</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>visible_hostname</code></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Restarting <code>squid.</code></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_sshd.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_sshd.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1f1cb7de --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakwizard_sshd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_sshd" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-ti1">OpenSSHデーモンの設定</title><subtitle>drakwizard sshd</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_sshd.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up an +<acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon. + </para> + <section> + <title>What is <acronym>SSH</acronym>?</title> + <para> + Secure Shell (SSH) is a cryptographic network protocol for secure data +communication, remote command-line login, remote command execution, and +other secure network services between two networked computers that connects, +via a secure channel over an insecure network, a server and a client +(running SSH server and <acronym>SSH</acronym> client programs, +respectively). (From Wikipedia) + </para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Setting up an <acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon with drakwizard sshd</title> + <para> + Welcome to the Open SSH wizard. + </para> + <procedure> + <step> + <title>Select Type of Configure Options</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Choose <guilabel>Expert</guilabel> for all options or +<guilabel>Newbie</guilabel> to skip steps 3-7, click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>全般オプション</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Sets visibility and root access options. Port 22 is the standard +<acronym>SSH</acronym> port. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Authentication Methods</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Allow a variety of authentication methods users can use while connecting, +then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Logging</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Choose logging facility and level of output, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Login Options</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Configure per-login settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>User Login Options</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Configure the user access settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Compression and Forwarding</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im8" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Configure X11 forwarding and compression during transfer, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>まとめ</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im9" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step8.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>完了</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im10" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step9.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakxservices.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakxservices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7198ce70 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/drakxservices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakxservices" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakxservices-ti1">システムサービスを有効化/無効化</title><subtitle>drakxservices</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata width="80%" xml:id="drakxservices-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakxservices.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakxservices</emphasis> as root.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/harddrake2.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/harddrake2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4164ff8b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/harddrake2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="harddrake2" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="harddrake2-ti1">Hardware configuration</title> + + <subtitle>harddrake2</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="harddrake2.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="harddrake2-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">harddrake2</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> gives a general view of the +hardware of your computer. When the tool is launched, it executes a job to +look for every element of the hardware. For that, it uses the command +<code>ldetect </code>which refers to a list of hardware in +<code>ldetect-lst</code> package.</para> + + <section> + <title>The window</title> + + <para>The window is divided in two columns.</para> + + <para>The left column contains a list of the detected hardware. The devices are +grouped by categories. Click on the > to expand the content of a +category. Each device can be selected in this column.</para> + + <para>The right column displays information about the selected device. The +<guimenu>Help -> Fields description</guimenu> gives some information +about the content of the fields.</para> + + <para>According to which type of device is selected, either one or two buttons are +available at the bottom of the right column:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guibutton>Set current driver options</guibutton>: this can be used to +parameterize the module which is used in relation to the device. This must +used by experts only.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guibutton>Run config tool</guibutton>: access to the tool which can +configure the device. The tool can often be accessed directly from the MCC.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The menu</title> + + <para><bridgehead>オプション</bridgehead></para> + + <para>The <guimenu>options</guimenu> menu gives the opportunity to check boxes to +enable automatic detection:</para> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>modem</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Jaz devices</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Zip parallel devices</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist>By default these detections are not enabled, because they are slow. Check +the appropriate box(es) if you have this hardware connected. Detection will +be operational the next time this tool is started.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/keyboarddrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/keyboarddrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..56163612 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/keyboarddrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="keyboarddrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="keyboarddrake-ti1">Set up the Keyboard Layout</title> + + + + <!-- 2012-09-02 marja changed the title to "Set up the Keyboard Layout", so it is the same as the title in MCC --> +<subtitle>keyboarddrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="keyboarddrake.png" xml:id="keyboarddrake-im1" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>序文</title> + + <para>The keyboarddrake tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">keyboarddrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> helps you +configure the basic layout for the keyboard that you wish to use on +Mageia. It affects the keyboard layout for all users on the system. It can +be found in the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled +"Configure mouse and keyboard".</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Keyboard Layout</title> + + <para>Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names (listed +in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or ethnicity each +layout should be used for.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Keyboard Type</title> + + <para>This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you are +unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default type.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/localedrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/localedrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c6f56210 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/localedrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="localedrake" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="localedrake-ti1">システムの言語を設定</title> + + <subtitle>localedrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="localedrake.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="localedrake-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">localedrake</emphasis> as root. + </para></footnote> can be found in the System +section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled "Manage localization for +your system". It opens with a window in which you can choose your +language. The choice is adapted to languages selected during installation.</para> + + <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button give access to activate +compatibility with old encoding (non UTF8).</para> + + <para>The second window shows a list of countries according to the selected +language. The button <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> gives access to +countries not listed.</para> + + <para>You have to restart your session after any modifications.</para> + +<section xml:id="input_method"> + <info> + <title xml:id="input_method-ti1">Input method</title> + </info> + <para>In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an +input method (from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the list). Input +methods allow users to input multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, +Korean, etc).</para> + <para> For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method so +users should not need to configure it manually.</para> + <para>Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc.) also provide similar functions +and can, if not available from the drop-down menu, be installed in another +part of the Mageia Control Center. See <xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref>.</para> +</section> + +</section> + diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/logdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/logdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cb44132e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/logdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="logdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="logdrake-ti1">システムログを見る</title> + + <subtitle>logdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="logdrake-im1" format="PNG" fileref="logdrake.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">logdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found in the Mageia +Control Center System tab, labelled "<guilabel>View and search system +logs</guilabel>".</para> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>To do a search in the logs</title> + + <para>First, enter the key string you want to look for in the <emphasis +role="bold">Matching</emphasis> field and/or the key string you want to +<emphasis>do not</emphasis> wish to see amongst the answers in the field +<emphasis role="bold">but not matching</emphasis>. Then select the file(s) +to search in the <guilabel>Choose file</guilabel> field. Optionally, it is +possible to limit the search to only one day. Select it in the <emphasis +role="bold">Calendar</emphasis>, using the little arrows on each side of the +month and year, and check "<guibutton>Show only for the selected +day</guibutton>". At last, click on the <guibutton>search</guibutton> button +to see the results in the window called <guilabel>Content of the +file</guilabel>. It is possible to save the results in the .txt format by +clicking on the <emphasis role="bold">Save</emphasis> button.</para> + + <note> + <para>The <guibutton>Mageia Tools Logs</guibutton> houses the logs from the Mageia +configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools. These logs are +updated each time a configuration is modified.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section> + <title>To configure a mail alert</title> + + <para><guibutton>Mail alert</guibutton> automatically checks the system load and +the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the configured +address.</para> + + <para>To configure this tool, click on the <emphasis role="bold">Mail +Alert</emphasis> button and then, in the next screen, on the<guibutton> +Configure the mail alert system</guibutton> drop down button. Here, all the +running services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want to +look watch. (See screenshot above).</para> + + <para>The following services can be watched :</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Webmin サービス</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Postfix メールサーバ</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>FTP サーバ</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Apache WWW サーバ</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>SSH サーバ</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>samba サーバ</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Xinetd サービス</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>BIND Domain Name Resolve</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="logdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>In the next screen, select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> value you consider +unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high load slows +the system down and a very high load may indicate that a process has gone +out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend setting the load value +to 3 times the number of processors.</para> + + <para>In the last screen, enter the <guilabel>Email address</guilabel> of the +person to be warned and the <guilabel>Email server</guilabel> to use (local +or on the Internet).</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/lsnetdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/lsnetdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..923d5a3b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/lsnetdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section +xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" +xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" +xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" +xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" +xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xml:id="lsnetdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="lsnetdrake-ti1">Display Available NFS And SMB Shares</title> + <subtitle>lsnetdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <para>This tool <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">lsnetdrake</emphasis>. + </para> + </footnote> can only be started and used +on the command line.</para> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Documentation +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/lspcidrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/lspcidrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3b1a4fa9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/lspcidrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="lspcidrake"> + <info> + <title xml:id="lspcidrake-ti1">Display Your PCI, USB and PCMCIA Information</title> + + <subtitle>lspcidrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <para>This tool <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">lspcidrake</emphasis>.</para> + </footnote> can only be started and used +on the command line. It will give some more information if used under root.</para> + + <para>lspcidrake gives the list of all the connected devices to the computer (USB, +PCI and PCMCIA) and the used drivers. It needs the ldetect and ldetect-lst +packages to work.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="lspcidrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>With the -v option, lspcidrake adds the vendor and device identifications.</para> + + <para>lspcidrake often generates very long lists, so, to find an information, it +is often used in a pipeline with the grep command, like in these examples:</para> + + <para>Information about the graphic card;</para> + + <para><command>lspcidrake | grep VGA</command></para> + + <para>Information about the network</para> + + <para><command>lspcidrake | grep -i network</command></para> + + <para>-i to ignore case distinctions.</para> + + <para>In this screenshot below, you can see the action of the -v option for +lspcidrake and the -i option for grep.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="lspcidrake2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>There is another tool that gives information about the hardware, it is +called <emphasis role="bold">dmidecode</emphasis> (under root)</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-boot.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-boot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d977e343 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-boot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="mcc-boot"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-boot-ti1">起動</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-boot.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="mcc-boot-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot +steps. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + + <orderedlist><title>起動方法の設定</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakautologin"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakboot"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakedm"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakautologin.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakboot.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakedm.xml"></xi:include> + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-hardware.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-hardware.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8b7bf18a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-hardware.xml @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="mcc-hardware"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-hardware-ti1">ハードウェア</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-hardware.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="mcc-hardware-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your +hardware. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>ハードウェアの管理</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="harddrake2"/><emphasis> = Browse and configure +hardware</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draksound"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>グラフィックスの設定</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drak3d"/><emphasis> = Configure 3D Desktop effects</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="XFdrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>マウスとキーボードの設定</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="keyboarddrake"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="mousedrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>印刷とスキャンの設定</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="system-config-printer"/><emphasis> = Set up the printer(s), +the print job queues, ...</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="scannerdrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>その他</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakups"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="harddrake2.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="draksound.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drak3d.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="XFdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="keyboarddrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="mousedrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="system-config-printer.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="scannerdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakups.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-intro.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-intro.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b8fc4411 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-intro.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xml:id="mcc-intro"><info><title xml:id="mcc-intro-ti1">About the Manual for the Mageia Control Center</title></info> + + + <para>The Mageia Control Center (MCC) has eight different options or tabs to +choose from in the left column, and even ten if the drakwizard package was +installed. Each of these tabs gives a different set of tools that can be +selected in the big right panel.</para> + + <para>The ten following chapters are about those ten options and the related +tools.</para> + +<para>The last chapter is about some other Mageia tools, that cannot be chosen in +any of the MCC tabs.</para> + + <para>The titles of the pages will often be the same as the titles of the tool +screens.</para> + + <para>There is also a search bar available, which you can access by clicking on +the "Search" tab in the left column.</para> + + </section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-localdisks.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-localdisks.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f07f7467 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-localdisks.xml @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-localdisks" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-localdisks-ti1">ローカルディスク</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="mcc-localdisks-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-localdisks.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your +local disks. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>ローカルディスク</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="drakdisk"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--removable"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--fileshare"></xref></para></listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakdisk.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--removable.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--fileshare.xml"></xi:include> + + + </section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-network.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-network.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..12cd1c4f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-network.xml @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-network" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-network-ti1">Network and Internet</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-network.png" xml:id="mcc-network-im1" /> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on a link +below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>ネットワークデバイスの管理</title> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draknetcenter"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakconnect"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakconnect--del"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>ネットワークのカスタマイズと保護</title> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakproxy"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakgw"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draknetprofile"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakvpn"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>その他</title> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="draknetcenter.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakconnect.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakconnect--del.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakproxy.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakgw.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="draknetprofile.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakvpn.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakhosts.xml"/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-networkservices.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-networkservices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..96fe403f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-networkservices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="mcc-networkservices"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-networkservices-ti1">ネットワークサービス</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-networkservices.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="mcc-networkservices-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Sharing</emphasis> are only visible if +the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose +between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or +on <xref linkend="mcc-sharing"/>to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>ネットワークサービス</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_dhcp"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_bind"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_squid"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_ntp"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_sshd"/></para> + </listitem> + + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_dhcp.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_bind.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_squid.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_ntp.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_sshd.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-networksharing.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-networksharing.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3142c9c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-networksharing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-networksharing" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-networksharing-ti1">ネットワーク共有</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="mcc-networksharing-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-networksharing.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and +directories. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <orderedlist><title>Windows(R) 共有の設定</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--smb"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="draksambashare"></xref><emphasis> = Share drives and +directories with Windows (SMB) systems</emphasis></para></listitem> + </orderedlist></listitem> + <listitem> + <orderedlist><title>NFS 共有の設定</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--nfs"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="draknfs"></xref></para></listitem> + </orderedlist></listitem> + <listitem> + <orderedlist><title>WebDAV 共有の設定</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--dav"></xref></para></listitem> + </orderedlist></listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--smb.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="draksambashare.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--nfs.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="draknfs.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--dav.xml"></xi:include> + + </section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-security.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-security.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ea1a1e76 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-security.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="mcc-security"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-security-ti1">セキュリティ</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-security.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="mcc-security-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a +link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>セキュリティ</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="msecgui"/><emphasis> = Configure system security, permissions +and audit</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakfirewall"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draksec"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakinvictus"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakguard"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="msecgui.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakfirewall.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="draksec.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakinvictus.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="drakguard.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-sharing.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-sharing.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4a41eaa2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-sharing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="mcc-sharing"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-sharing-ti1">共有</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-sharing.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="mcc-sharing-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Network Services</emphasis> are only +visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can +choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link +below or on <xref linkend="mcc-networkservices"/>to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>共有</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_proftpd"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_apache2"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_proftpd.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_apache2.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-system.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-system.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6682a120 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mcc-system.xml @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="mcc-system"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-system-ti1">システム</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="mcc-system.png" xml:id="mcc-system-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several system and administration +tools. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>システムサービスを管理</title> + <listitem> + <para> <xref linkend="drakauth"></xref> </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakxservices"></xref></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakfont"></xref></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>ローカライゼーション</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakclock"></xref></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="localedrake"></xref></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> +</listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>管理者用ツール</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="logdrake"></xref></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakconsole"></xref></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="userdrake"></xref><emphasis> = Manage users on +system</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="transfugdrake"></xref></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draksnapshot-config"></xref></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> +</listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakauth.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakxservices.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakfont.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakclock.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="localedrake.xml"></xi:include> + + + <xi:include href="logdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakconsole.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="userdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="transfugdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="draksnapshot-config.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/mgaapplet-config.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mgaapplet-config.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8baf0a05 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mgaapplet-config.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mgaapplet-config" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mgaapplet-config-ti1">更新頻度の設定</title> + + <subtitle>mgaapplet-config</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="mgaapplet-config-im1" format="PNG" fileref="mgaapplet-config.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Software +management</emphasis>. It is also available by a <guimenu>right click / +Updates configuration</guimenu> on the red icon <inlinemediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="MageiaUpdate1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </inlinemediaobject> in the system tray.</para> + + <para/> + + <para>The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check for +updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check. The +check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is +out.</para> + + <para/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/mousedrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mousedrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..854c24eb --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/mousedrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mousedrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mousedrake-ti1">マウスとタッチパッドを設定</title> + + <subtitle>mousedrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="mousedrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="mousedrake.png" align="center" format="PNG" /> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">mousedrake</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already installed by +Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse.</para> + + <para>The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your mouse +and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Most of the time "Universal / Any +PS/2 & USB mice" is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is +immediately taken into account.</para> + + </section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/msecgui.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/msecgui.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5fbb693d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/msecgui.xml @@ -0,0 +1,358 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="msecgui"> + <info> + <title xml:id="msecgui-ti1">MSEC: System Security and Audit</title> + + <subtitle>msecgui</subtitle> + </info> + + + + + <mediaobject> + <!-- written by Lebarhon 2014/01/03 To be checked--> +<imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="msecgui-im1" revision="1" fileref="msecgui.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + <section> + <title>Presentation</title> + + <para>msecgui<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">msecgui</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is a graphic user interface for +msec that allows to configure your system security according to two +approaches:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>It sets the system behaviour, msec imposes modifications to the system to +make it more secure.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>It carries on periodic checks automatically on the system in order to warn +you if something seems dangerous.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>msec uses the concept of "security levels" which are intended to configure a +set of system permissions, which can be audited for changes or +enforcement. Several of them are proposed by Mageia, but you can define your +own customised security levels.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Overview tab</title> + + <para>See the screenshot above</para> + + <para>The first tab takes up the list of the different security tools with a +button on the right side to configure them:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Firewall, also found in the MCC / Security / Set up your personal firewall</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Updates, also found in MCC / Software Management / Update your system</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>msec itself with some information:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>enabled or not</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the configured Base security level</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the date of the last Periodic checks and a button to see a detailed report +and another button to execute the checks just now.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Security settings tab</title> + + <para>A click on the second tab or on the Security +<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button leads to the same screen shown +below.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + <section> + <title>Basic security tab</title> + + <para role="underline"> + <emphasis role="underline">Security levels:</emphasis> + </para> + + <para>After having checked the box <guilabel>Enable MSEC tool</guilabel>, this tab +allows you by a double click to choose the security level that appears then +in bold. If the box is not checked, the level « none » is applied. The +following levels are available:</para> + + <orderedlist numeration="arabic"> + <listitem> + <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">none</emphasis>. This level is intended if you +do not want to use msec to control system security, and prefer tuning it on +your own. It disables all security checks and puts no restrictions or +constraints on system configuration and settings. Please use this level only +if you are knowing what you are doing, as it would leave your system +vulnerable to attack.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">standard</emphasis>. This is the default +configuration when installed and is intended for casual users. It +constrains several system settings and executes daily security checks which +detect changes in system files, system accounts, and vulnerable directory +permissions. (This level is similar to levels 2 and 3 from past msec +versions).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">secure</emphasis>. This level is intended when +you want to ensure your system is secure, yet usable. It further restricts +system permissions and executes more periodic checks. Moreover, access to +the system is more restricted. (This level is similar to levels 4 (High) and +5 (Paranoid) from old msec versions).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Besides those levels, different task-oriented security are also provided, +such as the <emphasis role="bold">fileserver </emphasis>, <emphasis +role="bold">webserver</emphasis> and <emphasis +role="bold">netbook</emphasis> levels. Such levels attempt to pre-configure +system security according to the most common use cases.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The last two levels called <emphasis role="bold">audit_daily </emphasis> and +<emphasis role="bold">audit_weekly</emphasis> are not really security levels +but rather tools for periodic checks only.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <para>These levels are saved in +<filename>etc/security/msec/level.<levelname></filename>. You can define +your own customised security levels, saving them into specific files called +<filename>level.<levelname></filename>, placed into the folder +<filename>etc/security/msec/.</filename> This function is intended for power +users which require a customised or more secure system configuration.</para> + + <caution> + <para>Keep in mind that user-modified parameters take precedence over default +level settings.</para> + </caution> + + <para> + <emphasis role="underline">Security alerts:</emphasis> + </para> + + <para>If you check the box <guibutton>Send security alerts by email +to:</guibutton>, the security alerts generated by msec are going to be sent +by local e-mail to the security administrator named in the nearby field. You +can fill either a local user or a complete e-mail address (the local e-mail +and the e-mail manager must be set accordingly). At last, you can receive +the security alerts directly on your desktop. Check the relevant box to +enable it.</para> + + <important> + <para>It is strongly advisable to enable the security alerts option in order to +immediately inform the security administrator of possible security +problems. If not, the administrator will have to regularly check the logs +files available in <filename>/var/log/security.</filename></para></important> + + <para><emphasis role="underline">Security options:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Creating a customised level is not the only way to customise the computer +security, it is also possible to use the tabs presented here after to change +any option you want. Current configuration for msec is stored in +<filename>/etc/security/msec/security.conf</filename>. This file contains +the current security level name and the list of all the modifications done +to the options.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>System security tab</title> + + <para>This tab displays all the security options on the left side column, a +description in the centre column, and their current values on the right side +column.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>To modify an option, double click on it and a new window appears (see +screenshot below). It displays the option name, a short description, the +actual and default values, and a drop down list where the new value can be +selected. Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the +choice.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui11.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <caution> + <para>Do not forget when leaving msecgui to save definitively your configuration +using the menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you +have changed the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before +saving them.</para> + </caution> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui10.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Network security</title> + + <para>This tab displays all the network options and works like the previous tab</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Periodic checks tab</title> + + <para>Periodic checks aim to inform the security administrator by means of +security alerts of all situations msec thinks potentially dangerous.</para> + + <para>This tab displays all the periodic checks done by msec and their frequency +if the box <guibutton>Enable periodic security checks</guibutton> is +checked. Changes are done like in the previous tabs.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Exceptions tab</title> + + <para>Sometimes alert messages are due to well known and wanted situations. In +these cases they are useless and wasted time for the administrator. This tab +allows you to create as many exceptions as you want to avoid unwanted alert +messages. It is obviously empty at the first msec start. The screenshot +below shows four exceptions.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>To create an exception, click on the <guibutton>Add a rule</guibutton> +button</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Select the wanted periodic check in the drop down list called +<guilabel>Check</guilabel> and then, enter the +<guilabel>Exception</guilabel> in the text area. Adding an exception is +obviously not definitive, you can either delete it using the +<guibutton>Delete</guibutton> button of the <guilabel>Exceptions</guilabel> +tab or modify it with a double clicK.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>権限</title> + <para>This tab is intended for file and directory permissions checking and +enforcement.</para> + <para>Like for the security, msec owns different permissions levels (standard, +secure, ..), they are enabled accordingly with the chosen security +level. You can create your own customised permissions levels, saving them +into specific files called <filename>perm.<levelname> </filename> placed +into the folder <filename>etc/security/msec/</filename> . This function is +intended for power users which require a customised configuration. It is +also possible to use the tab presented here after to change any permission +you want. Current configuration is stored in +<filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf.</filename> This file contains the +list of all the modifications done to the permissions.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui8.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>Default permissions are visible as a list of rules (a rule per line). You +can see on the left side, the file or folder concerned by the rule, then the +owner, then the group and then the permissions given by the rule. If, for a +given rule:</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is not checked, msec only checks if the +defined permissions for this rule are respected and sends an alert message +if not, but does not change anything.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is checked, then msec will rule the +permissions respect at the first periodic check and overwrite the +permissions.</para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <important><para>For this to work, the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis +role="bold">Periodic check tab</emphasis> must be configured accordingly.</para></important><para>To create a new rule, click on the <guibutton> Add a rule</guibutton> button +and fill the fields as shown in the example below. The joker * is allowed in +the <guilabel>File</guilabel> field. “current” means no modification.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui9.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the choice and do +not forget when leaving to save definitively your configuration using the +menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you have changed +the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before saving them. </para> + <note><para>It is also possible to create or modify the rules by editing the +configuration file <filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf</filename>. + </para></note> + <caution><para>Changes in the <emphasis role="bold">Permission tab</emphasis> (or directly +in the configuration file) are taken into account at the first periodic +check (see the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis role="bold">Periodic +checks tab</emphasis>). If you want them to be taken immediately into +account, use the msecperms command in a console with root rights. You can +use before, the msecperms -p command to know the permissions that will be +changed by msecperms.</para></caution> + <caution><para>Do not forget that if you modify the permissions in a console or in a file +manager, for a file where the box <guilabel>Enforce </guilabel> is checked +in the <emphasis role="bold">Permissions tab </emphasis>, msecgui will write +the old permissions back after a while, accordingly to the configuration of +the options CHECK_PERMS and CHECK_PERMS_ENFORCE in the <emphasis +role="bold">Periodic Checks tab </emphasis>.</para></caution> + </section> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/otherMageiaTools.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/otherMageiaTools.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0fd3b946 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/otherMageiaTools.xml @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="otherMageiaTools"> + <info> + <title xml:id="otherMageiaTools-ti1">Other Mageia Tools</title> + </info> + + <para>There are more Mageia tools than those that can be started in the Mageia +Control Center. Click on a link below to learn more, or continue reading the +next pages.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakbug"/><emphasis>drakbug</emphasis> + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakbug_report"/><emphasis>drakbug_report </emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="lsnetdrake"/><emphasis>TO BE WRITTEN </emphasis></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="lspcidrake"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>And more tools?</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakbug.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakbug_report.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="lsnetdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="lspcidrake.xml"></xi:include> + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/rpmdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/rpmdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b05483f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/rpmdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,251 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="rpmdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + <!--2012-09-03 marja expanded xml:id's of section and title below, because they conflicted with identical xml:id's in another page of MCC help, also replaced first para in some sections with title tags, removed figure tags--> +<info annotations="simonnzg 6jan2013"> + <title xml:id="rpmdrake-ti1">Software Management (Install and Remove Software)</title> + + <subtitle>rpmdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="rpmdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="rpmdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + + <section xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction"> + <title xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction-ti1">Introduction to rpmdrake</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">rpmdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote>, also known as drakrpm, is a +program for installing, uninstalling and updating packages. It is the +graphical user interface of URPMI. At each start up, it will check online +package lists (called 'media') downloaded straight from Mageia's official +servers, and will show you each time the latest applications and packages +available for your computer. A filter system allows you to display only +certain types of packages: you may display only installed applications (by +default), or only available updates. You can also view only not installed +packages. You can also search by the name of a package, or in the summaries +of descriptions or in the full descriptions of packages or in the file names +included in the packages.</para> + + <para>To work, rpmdrake needs the repositories to be configured with <xref +linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"/> .</para> + + <important> + <para>During the installation, the configured repository is the medium used for +the installation, generally the DVD or CD. If you keep this medium, rpmdrake +will ask it each time you want to install a package, with this pop-up window +: <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake8.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>If the above message annoys you +and you have a good internet connection without too strict download limit, +it is wise to remove that medium and replace it by online repositories +thanks to <xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"/> .</para> + + <para>Moreover, the online repositories are always up to date, contains much more +packages, and allow to update your installed packages.</para> + </important> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The main parts of the screen</title> + + <screenshot> +<mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></screenshot> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Package type filter:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This filter allows you to display only certain types of packages. The first +time you start the manager, it only displays applications with a graphical +interface. You can display either all the packages and all their +dependencies and libraries or only package groups such as applications only, +updates only or backported packages from newer versions of Mageia.</para> + + <warning> + <para>The default filter setting is for new entrants to Linux or Mageia, who +probably do not want command line or specialist tools. Since you're reading +this documentation, you're obviously interested in improving your knowledge +of Mageia, so it is best to set this filter to "All".</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><firstterm> <emphasis role="bold">Package state filter:</emphasis> +</firstterm></para> + + <para>This filter allows you to view only the installed packages, only the +packages that are not installed or all of the packages, both installed and +not installed.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Search mode:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Click on this icon to search through the package names, through their +summaries, through their complete description or through the files included +in the packages.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">"Find" box:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Enter here one or more key words. If you want to use more than one keyword +for searching use '|' between keywords, e.g. To search for "mplayer" and +"xine" at the same time type 'mplayer | xine'.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Erase all:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This icon can erase in one click all the key words entered in the "Find" box +.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Categories list:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This side bar groups all applications and packages into clear categories and +sub categories.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Description panel:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This panel displays the package's name, its summary and complete +description. It displays many useful elements about the selected package. It +can also show precise details about the package, the files included in the +package as well as a list of the last changes made by the maintainer.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The status column</title> + + <para>Once you correctly set the filters, you can find your software either by +category (in area 6 above) or by name/summary/description using area 4. A +list of packages fulfilling your query and, don't forget, the chosen medium +is shown with different status markers according to whether each package is +installed/not installed/an update... To change this status, just check or +uncheck the box before the package name and click on +<guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para> + + <para><table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2" align="left"> + <colspec align="center"/> + + <thead> + <row> + <entry align="center">アイコン</entry> + + <entry valign="middle" align="center">Legend</entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package is already installed</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package will be installed</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package cannot be modified</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package is an update</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package will be uninstalled</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table></para> + + <para>Examples in the screenshot above:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If I uncheck digikam (the green arrow tell us it is installed), the status +icon will go red with an up arrow and it will be uninstalled when clicking +on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If I check qdigidoc (which is not installed, see the status), the orange +with a down arrow status icon will appear and it will be installed when +clicking on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The dependencies</title> + + <screenshot> +<mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></screenshot> + + <para>Some packages need other packages called dependencies in order to work. They +are for example libraries or tools. In this case, Rpmdrake displays an +information window allowing you to choose whether to accept the selected +dependencies, cancel the operation or get more information (see above). It +may also happen that various packages are able to provide the needed +library, in which case rpmdrake displays the list of alternatives with a +button to get more information and another button to choose which package to +install.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/scannerdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/scannerdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c8f3583b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/scannerdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,259 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="scannerdrake" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerdrake-ti1">スキャナを設定</title> + <subtitle>scannerdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + + + <section xml:id="scannerinstallation"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerinstallation-ti1">インストール</title> + </info> + + <para>This tool <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing +<emphasis>scannerdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to configure a +single scanner device or a multifunction device which includes scanning. It +also allows you to share local devices connected to this computer with a +remote computer or to access remote scanners.</para> + + <para>When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the following +message:</para> + + <para><emphasis>"SANE packages need to be installed to use scanners</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis>Do you want to install the SANE packages?"</emphasis></para> + + <para>Choose <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> to continue. It will install +<code>scanner-gui</code> and <code>task-scanning</code> if they are not yet +installed.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen you see +the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for instance, +<emphasis>XSane</emphasis> or <emphasis>Simple Scan</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>In that case, you might now want to want to configure the <emphasis>Scanner +sharing</emphasis> option. You can read about it in the <xref +linkend="scannersharing"/>.</para> + + + <para>However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and checking its +cable(s) and power switch and then pressing <emphasis>Search for new +scanners</emphasis> doesn't help, you'll need to press <emphasis>Add a +scanner manually</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type from the +list for that brand and click <emphasis>Ok</emphasis></para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake2.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im2"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <note> + <para>If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click +<emphasis>Cancel</emphasis></para> + + <para>Please check whether your scanner is supported on the <link +xlink:href="http://www.sane-project.org/lists/sane-mfgs-cvs.html">SANE: +Supported Devices</link> page and ask for help in the <link +xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para> + </note> + +<figure xml:id="choosescannerport"> +<info> + <title xml:id="choosescannerport-ti1">Choose port</title> + </info> <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake3.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im3"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></figure> + + <para>You can leave this setting to <emphasis>Auto-detect available +ports</emphasis> unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In that +case, select <emphasis>/dev/parport0</emphasis> if you have only one.</para> + + <para>After clicking <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>, in most cases you will see a screen +similar to the one below.</para> +<para>If you don't get that screen, then please read the <xref +linkend="scannerextrasteps"/>.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake4.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im4"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section xml:id="scannersharing"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannersharing-ti2">Scannersharing</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake5.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im5"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine should be +accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You can also +decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made available on +this machine.</para> + + <para>Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added or +deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s), on +this computer.</para> + + <para>Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or deleted +from the list of hosts which give access to a remote scanner.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake6.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im6"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake7.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im7"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all remote +machines.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake8.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im8"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>"All remote machines" are allowed to access the local scanner.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake9.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im9"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If the package <emphasis>saned</emphasis> is not yet installed, the tool +offers to do it.</para> + + <para>At the end, the tool will alter these files:</para> + + <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/dll.conf </emphasis>to add or comment the directive +"net"</para> + + <para>It will also configure <emphasis>saned</emphasis> and +<emphasis>xinetd</emphasis> to be started on boot.</para> + </section> + +<section xml:id="scannerspecifics"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerspecifics-ti2">Specifics</title> + </info> + + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Hewlett-Packard</para> + + <para>Most HP scanners are managed from <emphasis>HP Device Manager</emphasis> +(hplip) which also manages printers. In this case, this tool does not allow +you to configure it and invites you to use <emphasis>HP Device +Manager</emphasis>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Epson</para> + + <para>Drivers are available from <link +xlink:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this +page</link>. When indicated, you must install the +<emphasis>iscan-data</emphasis> package first, then +<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> (in this order). It is possible that the +<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> package will generate a warning about a conflict +with <emphasis>sane</emphasis>. Users have reported that this warning can be +ignored.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + +</section> + +<section xml:id="scannerextrasteps"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerextrasteps-ti1">Extra installation steps</title> + </info> + + <para>It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the <xref +linkend="choosescannerport"/> screen, you need to take one or more extra +steps to correctly configure your scanner.</para> + +<itemizedlist> + + <listitem> +<para>In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded +each time it is started. This tool allows you to load it into the device, +after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the +firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you +downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor.</para><para> + When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at +each first usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient.</para> +</listitem> + + <listitem> +<para>Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the +<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/"name_of_your_SANE_backend".conf file.</emphasis> </para> + </listitem> + +<listitem> +<para>Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know +what to do, feel free to ask for help in the <link +xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para> +</listitem> + +</itemizedlist> + + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/software-management.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/software-management.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1b8e4b35 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/software-management.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" +xml:id="software-management"> + <info> + <title xml:id="software-management-ti1">ソフトウェアの管理</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="software-management-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="software-management.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools for software +management. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + <orderedlist><title>ソフトウェアの管理</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="MageiaUpdate"></xref><emphasis> = Update your +system</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="mgaapplet-config"></xref></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"></xref><emphasis> = Configure media +sources for install and update</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="rpmdrake.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="MageiaUpdate.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="mgaapplet-config.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="drakrpm-edit-media.xml"></xi:include> + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/system-config-printer.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/system-config-printer.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8c1551da --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/system-config-printer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,341 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="system-config-printer"> + + + + + <info> + <!-- Language proof JohnR 2012/08/28 --> +<!-- 2012-09-03 marja: made the link to Complete the installation process work (I hope) + Lebarhon : added All in one devices in the chapter "Hewlett-Packard printers" 12/13--> +<title xml:id="system-config-printer-ti1">Install and configure a printer</title> + + <subtitle>system-config-printer</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="system-config-printer-im1" format="PNG" fileref="system-config-printer.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section xml:id="introduction"> + <title xml:id="introduction-ti1">序文</title> + + <para>Printing is managed on Mageia by a server named CUPS. It has its own <link +ns2:title="CUPS" ns2:href="http://localhost:631">configuration +interface</link> which is accessible via an Internet browser, but Mageia +offers its own tool for installing printers called system-config-printer +which is shared with other distributions such as Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu +and openSUSE.</para> + + <para>You should enable the non-free repository before proceeding with the +installation, because some drivers may only be available in this way.</para> + + <para>Printer installation is carried out in the <guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> +section of the Mageia Control Centre. Select the <guilabel>Configure +printing and scanning</guilabel> tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing +<emphasis>system-config-printer</emphasis>. The root password will be asked +for.</para> + </footnote>.</para> + + <para>MCC will ask for the installation two packages:</para> + + <blockquote> + <para>task-printing-server</para> + + <para>task-printing-hp</para> + </blockquote> + + <para>It is necessary to accept this installation to continue. Up to 230MB of +dependencies are needed.</para> + + <para>To add a printer, choose the "Add" printer button. The system will try to +detect any printers and the ports available. The screenshot displays a +printer connected to a parallel port. If a printer is detected, such as a +printer on a USB port, it will be displayed on the first line. The window +will also attempt to configure a network printer.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="automatic"> + <title>Automatically detected printer</title> + + <para>This usually refers to USB printers. The utility automatically finds the +name of the printer and displays it. Select the printer and then click +"Next". If there is a known driver associated for the printer, it will be +automatically installed. If there is more than one driver or no known +drivers, a window will ask you to select or furnish one, as explained in the +next paragraph. Continue with <xref linkend="terminate"/></para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="non_automatic"> + <title>No automatically detected printer</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="printer3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>When you select a port, the system loads a driver list and displays a window +to select a driver. The choice can be made through one of the following +options.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Select printer from database</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>provide PPD file</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>search for a driver to download</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>By selecting from the database, the window suggests a printer manufacturer +first, and then a device and a driver associated with it. If more than one +driver is suggested, select one which is recommended, unless you have +encountered some problems with that one before, in this case select the one +which know to work.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="terminate"> + <title>Complete the installation process</title> + + <para>After the driver selection, a window requests some information which will +allow the system to designate and discover the printer. The first line is +the name under which the device will appear in applications in the list of +available printers. The installer then suggests printing a test page. After +this step, the printer is added and appears in the list of available +printers.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="network_printer"> + <title>Network printer</title> + + <para>Network printers are printers that are attached directly to a wired or +wireless network, that are attached to a printserver or that are attached to +another workstation that serves as printserver.</para> + + <note> + <para>Often, it is better to configure the DHCP server to always associate a fixed +IP address with the printer's MAC-address. Of course that should be the same +as the IP address the printer of printserver is set to, if it has a fixed +one.</para> + </note> + + <para>The printer's Mac-address is a serial number given to the printer or +printserver or computer it is attached to, that can be obtained from a +configuration page printed by the printer or which may be written on a label +on the printer or printserver. If your shared printer is attached to a +Mageia system, you can run <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis> on it +as root to find the MAC-address. It is the sequence of numbers and letters +after "HWaddr".</para> + + <para>You can add your network printer by choosing the protocol it uses to talk to +your computer over the network. If you don't know which protocol to choose, +you can try the <guilabel>Network Printer</guilabel> - <guilabel>Find +Network Printer</guilabel> option in the <guilabel>Devices</guilabel> menu +and give the IP address of the printer in the box on the right, where it +says "host".</para> + + <para>If the tool recognises your printer or printserver, it will propose a +protocol and a queue, but you can choose a more appropriate one from the +list below it or give the correct queue name if it isn't in the list.</para> + + <para>Look in the documentation that came with your printer or printserver to find +which protocol(s) it supports and for possible specific queue names.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="network_printing_protocols"> + <title>Network printing protocols</title> + + <para>One current technique is one developed by Hewlett-Packard and known as +JetDirect. It allows access to a printer directly connected to the network +via an Ethernet port. You must know the IP-address at which the printer is +known on the network. This technique is also used inside some ADSL-routers +which contain an USB port to connect the printer. In this case, the +IP-address is that of the router. Note that the tool "Hp Device manager" can +manage dynamically configured IP-adress, setting an URI like +<emphasis>hp:/net/<name-of-the-printer></emphasis> . In this case, fixed +IP-adress is not required.</para> + + <para>Choose the option <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> as the +protocol and set the address in <guilabel>Host:</guilabel>, do not change +the <guilabel>Port Number</guilabel>, unless you know that it needs to be +changed. After the selection of the protocol, the selection of the driver is +the same as above.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="printer5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The other protocols are:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipp)</emphasis>: a printer which can +be accessed on a TCP/IP network via the IPP protocol, for example a printer +connected to a station using CUPS. This protocol may also be used also by +some ADSL-routers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (https): </emphasis>the same as ipp, +but using http transport and with TLS secured protocol. The port has to be +defined. By default, the port 631 is used.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipps): </emphasis>the same as ipp, but +with TLS secured protocol.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>LPD/LPR host or Printer</emphasis>: a printer which can be +accessed on a TCP/IP network via the LPD protocol, for example a printer +connected to a station using LPD.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Windows printer via SAMBA</emphasis>: a printer connected to a +station running Windows or a SMB server and shared.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>The URI can also be added directly. Here are some examples on how to form +the URI:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Appsocket</para> + + <para><uri>socket://ip-address-or-hostname:port </uri></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)</para> + + <para><uri>ipp://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri></para> + + <para><uri>http://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol</para> + + <para><uri>lpd://username@ip-address-or-hostname/queue</uri></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>Additional information can be found in the <link +ns2:href="http://www.cups.org/documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html">CUPS +documentation.</link></para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="properties"> + <title>Device Properties</title> + + <para>You can access the properties of the device. The menu allows access to +parameters for the CUPS server. By default a CUPS server is launched on your +system, but you can specify a different one with the +<guimenu>Server</guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Connect...</guimenuitem> menu, +another window which gives access to the tuning of other specific parameters +of the server, following <guimenu>Server</guimenu> | +<guimenuitem>Settings.</guimenuitem></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title xml:id="troubleshoot">Troubleshoot</title> + + <para>You can find some information on occurring errors during printing by +inspecting <filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename></para> + + <para>You can also access to a tool to diagnose problems using the +<guimenu>Help</guimenu> | <guilabel>Troubleshoot</guilabel> menu.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="specificities"> + <title>Specifics</title> + + <para>It is possible that some drivers for specific printers are not available in +Mageia or are not functional. In this case, have a look at the <link +ns2:href="http://openprinting.org/printers/">openprinting</link> site to +check if a driver for your device is available. If yes, check if the package +is already present in Mageia and in this case install it manually. Then, +redo the installation process to configure the printer. In all cases, report +the problem in bugzilla or on the forum if you are comfortable with this +tool and furnish the model and driver information and whether the printer +works or not after installation. Here are some sources to find other +up-to-date drivers or for more recent devices.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Brother printers</emphasis></para> + + <para><link +ns2:href="http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/linux/en/download_prn.html">This +page</link> give a list of drivers provided by Brother. Search the driver +for your device, download the rpm(s) and install.</para> + + <para>You should install Brother drivers before running the configuration utility.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Hewlett-Packard printers and All in one +devices</emphasis></para> + + <para>These devices use the hplip tool. It is installed automatically after the +detection or the selection of the printer. You can find other information +<link +ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html">here</link>. The +tool "HP Device Manager" is available in the <guilabel>System</guilabel> +menu. Also view <link +ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/install/manual/hp_setup.html">configuration</link> +for the management of the printer.</para> + + <para>A HP All in one device must be installed as a printer and the scanner +features will be added. Note that sometimes, the Xsane interface doesn't +allow to scan films or slides (the lighting slid can't operate). In this +case, it is possible to scan, using the standalone mode, and save the +picture on a memory card or USB stick inserted in the device. Afterwards, +open your favourite imaging software and load your picture from the memory +card which is appeared in the /media folder.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Samsung colour printer</emphasis></para> + + <para>For specific Samsung and Xerox colour printers, <link +ns2:href="http://foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/">this site provides drivers</link> for +the QPDL protocol.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Epson printers and scanners</emphasis></para> + + <para>Drivers for Epson printers are available from <link +ns2:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this +search page</link>. For the scanner part, you must install the "iscan-data" +package first, then "iscan" (in this order). A iscan-plugin package can also +be available and is to install. Choose the <emphasis>rpm</emphasis> packages +according to your architecture. </para> + + <para> It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about a +conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be ignored.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Canon printers</emphasis></para> + + <para>For Canon printers, it may be advisable to install a tool named turboprint +<link ns2:href="http://www.turboprint.info/">available here </link>.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/transfugdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/transfugdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6751a25b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/transfugdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="transfugdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja"> + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Written by yurchor 2013-07-03 --> +<!-- Tproof --> +<!-- --> +<title xml:id="transfugdrake-ti1">Windows® のドキュメントと設定をインポート</title> + + <subtitle>transfugdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="transfugdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="transfugdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">transfugdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the <emphasis +role="bold">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center labeled +<guilabel>Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</guilabel></para> + + <para>The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and settings +from a <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> 2000, <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark> XP or <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark> <trademark>Vista</trademark> +installation on the same computer as the Mageia installation.</para> + + <warning> + <para>Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake +immediately after pressing <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </warning> + + <para>After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with some +explanation about the tool and import options.</para> + + <para>As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. This should run a detection of +<trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> installation.</para> + + <para>When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows you to +choose accounts in <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> and +Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user account +than yours own.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <note> + <para>Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend of +transfugdrake) limitations <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> +user account names with special symbols can be displayed incorrectly.</para> + </note> + + <note> + <para>Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document folders.</para> + </note> + + <warning> + <para>Some <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> applications +(especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For +example, NVidia drivers in <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark>are updated using +<emphasis>UpdatusUser</emphasis>. Please do not use such accounts for the +import purposes.</para> + </warning> + + <para>When you finished with the accounts selection press +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method +to import documents:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Transfugdrake is designed to import <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark> data from <emphasis>My +Documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>My Music</emphasis> and <emphasis>My +Pictures</emphasis> folders. It is possible to skip import by selecting the +appropriate item in this window.</para> + + <para>When you finished with the document import method choosing press +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method +to import bookmarks:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Transfugdrake can import <emphasis>Internet Explorer</emphasis> and +<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia +<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> instance.</para> + + <para>Choose the preferred import option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> +button.</para> + + + + <!-- Does not work as expected, might be due to incompatible version of OE + <para> +With transfugdrake, it is possible to import <emphasis>Outlook Express</emphasis> settings and mail archives into <emphasis>Evolution</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>When you finished with the mail import method choosing press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method to import mail:</para> +--> +<para>The next page allows you to import desktop background:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Choose the preferred option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> +button.</para> + + <para>The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press the +<guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/ja/userdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/ja/userdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dfda84f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/mcc-help/ja/userdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ja" xml:id="userdrake"> + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-27 --> +<!-- Tproof --> +<!-- Preliminary lproof JohnR 2012-08-30 --> +<!-- --> +<title xml:id="userdrake-ti1">ユーザとグループ</title> + + <subtitle>userdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="userdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="userdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">userdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the <emphasis +role="bold">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled +"Manage users on system"</para> + + <para>The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups, this +means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group settings +(ID, shell, ...)</para> + + <para>When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are listed in +the <guibutton>Users</guibutton> tab, and all the groups in the +<guibutton>Groups</guibutton> tab. Both tabs operate the same way.</para> + + <para><guibutton>1 Add User</guibutton></para> + + <para>This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="userdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The field <emphasis role="bold">Full Name</emphasis> is intended for the +entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write anything +or nothing as well!</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Login</emphasis> is the only required field.</para> + + <para>Setting a <emphasis role="bold">Password</emphasis> is highly +recommended. There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the +password is weak, too short or is too similar to the login name. You should +use figures, lower and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The +shield will turn orange and then green as the password strength improves.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Confirm Password</emphasis> field is there to ensure +you entered what you intended to.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Login Shell </emphasis>is a drop down list that allows +you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options are +Bash, Dash and Sh.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Create a private group for the user</emphasis>, if +checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new +user as the only member (this may be edited).</para> + + <para>The other options should be obvious. The new user is created immediately +after you click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">2 Add Group</emphasis></para> + + <para>You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the specific +group ID.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">3 Edit</emphasis> (a selected user)</para> + + <para><guibutton>User Data</guibutton>: Allows you to modify all the data given +for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed).</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Account Info</emphasis>:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="userdrake2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account. +Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary +accounts.</para> + + <para>The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as long +as the account is locked.</para> + + <para>It is also possible to change the icon.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Password Info</emphasis>: Allows you to set an +expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his +password periodically.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="userdrake3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Group</emphasis>: Here you can select the groups that +the user is a member of.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will not be +effective until his/her next login.</para> + </note> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">4 Edit</emphasis> (with a group selected)</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Data</emphasis>: Allows you to modify the group +name.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Users</emphasis>: Here you can select the users +who are members of the group</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">5 Delete</emphasis></para> + + <para>Select a user or a group and click on <emphasis +role="bold">Delete</emphasis> to remove it. For a user, a window appears to +ask if home directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private group +has been created for the user, it will be deleted as well.</para> + + <warning> + <para>It is possible to delete a group which is not empty.</para> + </warning> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">6 Refresh</emphasis></para> + + <para>The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this icon to +refresh the display.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">7 Guest Account</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">guest</emphasis> is a special account. It is intended +to give somebody temporary access to the system with total security. Login +is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to make modifications +to the system from this account. The personal directories are deleted at the +end of the session. This account is enabled by default, to disable it, click +in the menu on<guimenu> Actions -> Uninstall guest account</guimenu>.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file |